Exported : 10/08/2006 10:03:36 PM
2006
Higher Education
Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science
School of Health Sciences

Courses

HBAH Bachelor of Chinese Medicine (Acupuncture and Herbs)
Bachelor of Chinese Medicine (Acupuncture and Herbs)
Course Code : HBAH
Double Major
(For students commencing 2005 onwards)
Course Objectives
The aims of the course are to:
· provide students with detailed training in Chinese medical theory and practice, including acupuncture and Chinese herbal medicine;
· provide students with comprehensive Chinese medical skills in both acupuncture and Chinese herbal medicine, incorporating adjunctive approaches such as meditation, health enhancement and CM dietary modalities;
· ensure that students practise from Chinese medical theory, whilst integrating western medical information as appropriate, to ensure that graduates are safe and competent in the practice of Chinese Medicine;
· provide students with quality clinical experiences in hospitals and complementary health clinics from Year One of the program;
· provide students with the option of undertaking a clinical internship placement in an appropriate hospital settting in China or other countries; and
· provide students with opportunities for research and higher degree in Chinese Medicine on the completion of their undergraduate degree.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have satisfactorily completed the Victorian Certificate of Education (VCE), or equivalent with a study score of at least 20 in Units 3 and 4 English. It is also desirable, but not essential, that applicants have completed VCE level studies in biology, chemistry, psychology, or Asian studies.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements but who possess appropriate educational qualifications, or work experience which would enable them to successfully undertake the course, will be considered for admission.
Course Duration
The course is offered on a full-time basis over four years or part-time equivalent.
Course Location
This course if offered at the St Albans campus.
Clinical Placement
Students will be required to undergo a Victorian Police Check before commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for graduation. Students will be required to show evidence of a current first aid in the workplace level 2 qualification whilst enrolled in the clinical practice unit.
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide continuity of patient care.
Course Structure
All students will study both Acupuncture and Chinese Herbal Medicine throughout the four years of this integrated program.
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT1000	MAJOR CLASSICS - NEI JING	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT1001	INTRODUCTION TO CHINESE MEDICAL LITERACY	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHT1002	FUNDAMENTALS OF CHINESE MEDICINE	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHT1100	INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH ENHANCEMENT	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT1101	ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATION 1	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
RBM1515	ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 1	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT1005	CHINESE MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND PATHOGENESIS 1	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHT1007	CHINESE PHARMACOPEIA	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT1009	INTRO TO CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACT	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHT1201	ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATION 2	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
RBM1525	ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
RBM1910	MICROBIOLOGY FOR CHINESE MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783

Year Two
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT2003	CHINESE MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND PATHOGENESIS 2	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHT2009	PHARMACOPOEIA AND DISPENSING	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHT2011	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHT2100	FORMULAE AND STRATEGIES 1	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT2104	ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING: THEORY AND PRACTICE 1	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
RBM2911	PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 1	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT2000	HEALTH ENHANCEMENT (YANG SHENG)	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT2200	FORMULAE AND STRATEGIES 2	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT2202	ACUPUNCTURE THEORY SYSTEMS AND METHODS	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT2203	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 2	16	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,075
HHT2205	ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING: THEORY AND PRACTICE 2	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
RBM2912	PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 2	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Year Three
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT3100	CHINESE MEDICAL MICRO-SYSTEMS	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT3103	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 3	16	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,075
HHT3104	MAJOR CLASSICS - SHANG HAN LUN & WENG BING 1	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHT3106	INTERNAL MEDICINE 1	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT3108	CHINESE MEDICINE THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS 1	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
RBM3921	WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND INTERVENTIONS 1	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT3003	COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR CHINESE MEDICAL PRACTICE	8	0.0830	1	$325	$407	$931
HHT3105	MAJOR CLASSICS-SHANG HAN LUN WENG BING 2	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT3203	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 4	16	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,075
HHT3207	INTERNAL MEDICINE 2	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT3111	CHINESE MEDICINE THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS 2	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
RBM3922	WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSES AND INTERVENTIONS 2	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783

Year Four
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT4002	RESEARCH METHODS FOR CHINESE MEDICINE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4108	CHINESE MEDICINE TRAUMATOLOGY	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4100	CASE CONFERENCING AND CLINICAL ISSUES 1	6	0.0630	0	$247	$247	$706
HHT4101	CHINESE MEDICINE OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4103	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1	16	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,075
RBM4923	WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSES AND INTERVENTIONS 3	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT4004	PROFESSIONAL ISSUES FOR CHINESE MEDICAL PRACTICE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4200	CASE CONFERENCING AND CLINICAL ISSUES 2	6	0.0630	0	$247	$247	$706
HHT4201	CHINESE MEDICINE PAEDIATRICS	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4203	CHINESE MEDICINE DERMATOLOGY	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4204	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP TWO	16	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,075
RBM4924	WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSES AND INTERVENTIONS 4	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Graduation Requirements
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Chinese Medicine (Acupuncture and Herbs) degree, students must pass all components of assessment and satisfactorily complete all theoretical and clinical hurdle requirements to proficiency standards as specified in Ferrigno, P. (Compiler). (2005). School of Health Sciences Chinese Medicine Clinical Logbook [CD and manual]. Melbourne: Victoria University of Technology, School of Health Sciences, CM Unit; and Mathieson, L. (Producer). (2005). School of Health Sciences Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice demo CD [CD]. Melbourne: Victoria University of Technology, School of Health Sciences, CM Unit. Students should presume that the content in those references constitutes Required Reading throughout the entire Chinese Medicine degree.
Professional Recognition
It is expected that graduates will meet the requirements of the Chinese Medicine Registration Board of Victoria and be eligible for membership of the major professional associations.

HBAT Acupuncture Stream Bachelor of Health Science - Chinese Medicine
Bachelor of Health Science - Chinese Medicine
Course Code: HBAT Acupuncture Stream
HBHE Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream
(Remaining units for continuing students only. Courses not available after 2006.)
Course Structure

Year Four
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT4100	CASE CONFERENCING AND CLINICAL ISSUES 1	6	0.0630	0	$247	$247	$706
HHT4002	RESEARCH METHODS FOR CHINESE MEDICINE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4003	CHINESE MEDICAL SPECIALTIES	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHK4001	TREATMENT OF MUSCULO-SKELETAL DISORDERS	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHK4002	CHINESE MEDICAL SPECIALTIES: ACUPUNCTURE	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHK4010	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1 - ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR	16	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,075

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT4200	CASE CONFERENCING AND CLINICAL ISSUES 2	6	0.0630	0	$247	$247	$706
HHT4004	PROFESSIONAL ISSUES FOR CHINESE MEDICAL PRACTICE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4005	CHINESE MEDICINE ACUTE INTERVENTIONS	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHK4004	SCHOOLS OF THOUGHT IN ACUPUNCTURE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHK4020	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2 - ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR	24	0.2500	2	$1,396	$1,745	$3,106

Clinical Training
Teaching clinics usually operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be required to attend clinical sessions outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide continuity of patient care.
Graduation Requirements
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science - Chinese Medicine degree, students must pass all components of assessment and satisfactorily complete all theoretical and clinical hurdle requirements to proficiency standards as specified in Beer, S. (Ed.). (1999). Clinical Policies and Procedures Manual. Melbourne: Victoria University, School of Health Science, TCM Unit; Ferrigno, P. (Ed.). (2003). Logbook of clinical hours [CD and manual]. Melbourne: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, TCM Unit; and Williams, V. (Ed.). (2001). Clinical Policies and Procedures Manual. Melbourne: Victoria University, School of Health Science, TCM Unit. Students should presume that the content in those references constitutes required reading throughout the entire Chinese Medicine degree.

HBCD Bachelor of Health Science - Clinical Dermal Therapies
Bachelor of Health Science - Clinical Dermal Therapies
Course Code: HBCD
(This course is currently under review.)
Course Objectives
The aims of the course are to:
· provide an opportunity for qualified Beauty Therapists to establish and develop knowledge and skills in advanced dermal therapy treatments;
· instruct appropriately qualified practitioners in safe and effective therapies to supplement their existing dermal therapies practice and enhance the health of the client;
· extend and expand interpersonal skills in relation to the demands of practice;
· examine current developments in dermal therapy, advanced dermal therapy techniques and the application of these in practice;
· develop research perspectives within the context of Clinical Dermal Therapy and Clinical Dermal Therapy practice;
· provide a pathway to Degree level for Diploma of Beauty Therapy students;
· enhance career options for those Beauty Therapists working in the field;
· establish an educational benchmark for the practice of Clinical Dermal Therapies.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have completed the Diploma of Beauty Therapy, or equivalent, and have a minimum of one years' work experience in the field. Applicants may be required to attend an interview. International students are eligible to apply for entry to the course.
Students will be required to undergo a Victoria Police check before commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for graduation.
Course Duration
The course is offered over three semesters full-time or part-time equivalent.
Course Structure
Classes are conducted over three semesters each year, one day a week.
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
APU3001	PSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUES	12	0.1250	1	$490	$612	$1,402
HHD3000	HEALTH SCIENCE 1	12	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,074
HHD3110	DERMAL TECHNIQUES 1	12	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,074

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHD3002	HEALTH SCIENCE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHD3100	CLINICAL PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHD3102	RESEARCH PERSPECTIVES AND PRACTICES	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHD3220	DERMAL TECHNIQUES 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Three

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHD3103	NUTRITION FOR HEALTH AND WELL-BEING	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHD3104	GRADUATING SEMINAR	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHD3200	CLINICAL PRACTICE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHD3330	DERMAL TECHNIQUES 3	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Clinical Training
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide continuity of patient care.
Website
www.staff.vu.edu.au/cdt
Graduation Requirements
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science - Clinical Dermal Therapies degree, students must pass all components of assessment where indicated and satisfactorily complete all theoretical and clinical hurdle requirements to proficiency standards as specified by local industry and government requirements.
Career Opportunities
Students will obtain knowledge and skills to equip them for professional careers in the growing field of Clinical Dermal Therapy. Graduates find career paths that allow them to perform advanced treatments such as laser on their clients and to work together with medical, paramedical and allied health professionals to enhance aesthetic outcomes in exciting areas like dermal plastic surgery and re-constructive surgery.
Professional Recognition
All graduates should be eligible for membership with the Australian Society of Dermal Clinicians.

HBDH Chinese Herb specific (Year5) Bachelor of Health Science (Chinese Medicine & Clinical Sciences)
Bachelor of Health Science (Chinese Medicine & Clinical Sciences)
Course Code: HBDH Chinese Herb specific (Year5)
(Double Major)
(Continuing students only)
Year Five
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT1000	MAJOR CLASSICS - NEI JING	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4100	CASE CONFERENCING AND CLINICAL ISSUES 1	6	0.0630	0	$247	$247	$706
HHT4002	RESEARCH METHODS FOR CHINESE MEDICINE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4108	CHINESE MEDICINE TRAUMATOLOGY	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHK4002	CHINESE MEDICAL SPECIALTIES: ACUPUNCTURE	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHK4010	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1 - ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR	16	0.1670	2	$932	$1,165	$2,075

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT4200	CASE CONFERENCING AND CLINICAL ISSUES 2	6	0.0630	0	$247	$247	$706
HHT4004	PROFESSIONAL ISSUES FOR CHINESE MEDICAL PRACTICE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHT4005	CHINESE MEDICINE ACUTE INTERVENTIONS	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHK4004	SCHOOLS OF THOUGHT IN ACUPUNCTURE	6	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHK4020	CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2 - ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR	24	0.2500	2	$1,396	$1,745	$3,106

Professional Recognition
It is expected that graduates will meet the requirements of the Chinese Medicine Registration Board of Victoria and be eligible for membership of the major professional associations

HBMN (internet)/HBNL (local) Bachelor of Health Science - Natural Medicine (Conversion)
Bachelor of Health Science - Natural Medicine (Conversion)
Course Code: HBMN (internet)/HBNL (local)
(These courses are currently under review.)
Course Objectives
The aims of the course are to:
· augment skills and knowledge of health practice in relation to critical reflection and research;
· provide an education which further develops the individual's personal, professional and intellectual growth;
· enable graduates to broaden their understanding of the physical, socio-economic and psychological factors impacting upon health; and
· enable graduates to articulate into higher degree pathways.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have a Diploma or Advanced Diploma in natural medicine, complementary therapies; or equivalent in a related area. In addition to this, applicants would normally be expected to be practising in the field of natural medicine, complementary therapies or an equivalent related field.
Course Duration
The course is offered on a one-year full-time basis or part-time equivalent.
Course Structure
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHN0011	PHILOSOPHICAL CONCEPTS IN NATURAL MEDICINE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHN0012	ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHN0013	RESEARCH SKILLS	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHN0014	DEVELOPING PHARMACOLOGICAL UNDERSTANDING IN NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTICE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHN0021	COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS	12	0.1250	1	$490	$612	$1,402
HHN0022	PROFESSIONAL WRITING IN NATURAL MEDICINE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHN0023	RESEARCH PROJECT	24	0.2500	2	$1,396	$1,745	$3,106

Articulation Pathways and Credit
Students who successfully complete the course will be eligible to apply for credit towards the Graduate Diploma in Western Herbal Medicine and Graduate Diploma in Complementary Medicine. In turn, completion of either of the Graduate Diplomas provides eligibility for entry to the Master of Health Science by Coursework.

HBNH Bachelor of Health Science Naturopathy & Homoeopathy
Bachelor of Health Science Naturopathy & Homoeopathy
Course Code: HBNH
(This course is currently under review.)
Course Objectives
· demonstrate the principles and practice of bodywork, naturopathy and homoeopathy;
· develop skills to an advanced level for the promotion of health and wellbeing within the Community;
· perform clinical skills to an advanced level with the use of naturopathy and homoeopathy;
· apply and demonstrate safe practices in the prescribing and the preparation of naturopathic herbal preparations;
· apply and demonstrate safe practices in the prescribing and preparation of homoeopathic preparations;
· demonstrate skills for the clinical assessment of patients and demonstrate an ability to prescribe the most appropriate form of treatment;
· recognise and refer patients to medical facilities where appropriate;
· communicate effectively within practice;
· work both autonomously and collaboratively as a professional; and
· accurately assess the health of patients after completing a thorough naturopathic or homoeopathic consultation.
Course Structure
The course is full-fee paying and comprises:
· two years in TAFE - Advanced Diploma in Naturopathy;
· integration semester - a combined summer program;
· two years Higher Education - degree conversion.
Summer School

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHH2301	UNIVERSITY SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE STUDENTS	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH2302	IRIDOLOGY 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH2303	BODYWORK THERAPIES 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH2304	AROMATHERAPY	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Year 3
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHH3100	BODYWORK THERAPIES 2	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3101	IRIDOLOGY 2	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3102	HOMOEOPATHY 1	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3103	PHYTOTHERAPEUTIC MATERIA MEDICA 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH3104	NATUROPATHIC AND HOMEOPATHIC CLINICALS	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHH3200	HOMEOPATHY 2	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3201	NUTRICEUTICALS	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3202	COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3203	DEVELOPING PHARMACOLOGICAL UNDERSTANDING IN NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTICE	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3204	VIBRATIONAL MEDICINE	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH3205	NATUROPATHIC AND HOMOEOPATHIC INTERNSHIP 1	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Year 4
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHH4100	HOMOEOPATHY 3	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH4101	RESEARCH METHODS	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH4102	ETHICAL AND LEGAL STUDIES	8	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH4103	PHYTOTHERAPEUTIC MATERIA MEDICA 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH4104	NATUROPATHIC AND HOMEOPATHIC CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHH4200	ADVANCED NUTRITIONAL UNDERSTANDING	0	0.0000	0	$0	$0	$0
HHH4201	ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS AND SYMPTOMOLOGY FOR NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH4202	PROFESSIONAL ISSUES	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH4203	CURRENT RESEARCH TRENDS IN NATURAL MEDICINE	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHH4204	NATUROPATHIC AND HOMOEOPATHIC CLINICAL INTERNSHIP TWO	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553

Admission Requirements
To qualify for entry into the course students must have completed the Advanced diploma in Naturopathy or equivalent conducted by TAFE. Applicants must also have successfully completed the Victoria Certificate of Education (not more than two attempts) or the equivalent, with a pass or better in English and either Chemistry or Biology.
Mature age applicants will need to complete a supplementary information form, giving references to the applicant's life and work experience, motivation and past education record.
Students will be required to undergo a Victorian Police check before commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for graduation.
Course Duration
The course is offered fulltime over nine semesters with an integrated summer semester or part-time equivalent.
Clinical Training
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide continuity of patient care.
Graduation Requirements
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science - Naturopathy & Homoeopathy degree, students must pass all components of assessment where indicated and satisfactorily complete all theoretical and clinical hurdle requirements to proficiency standards as specified in Williams, V. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical Policies and Procedures Manual. Melbourne: Victoria University, School of Health Science, CIMU. Students should presume that the contents in this reference constitute Required Reading throughout the entire Naturopathy & Homoeopathy degree.

HBOS Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences
Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences
Course Code: HBOS
(Subject to approval by the Osteopaths Registration Board)
Course Objectives
The aims of the course are to:
· prepare graduates for entry into the Master of Health Science - Osteopathy. Upon completion of the Masters degree, a graduate will be eligible to apply for registration as an osteopath;
· provide an education which contributes to the individual's personal, professional and intellectual growth;
· provide an education which contributes to the preparation of competent primary health care practitioners who, upon graduation from the Masters degree, are able to: apply osteopathic principles to formulate and prescribe suitable and safe management of patients; assess the health status of the patient, including physical, socio-economic and psychological factors; communicate with the patient and interact with other health care providers and advisers for the benefit of the patient.
· prepare graduates for entry into the Master of Health Science - Osteopathy. Upon completion of the Masters degree, a graduate will be eligible to apply for registration as an osteopath;
· provide an education which contributes to the individual's personal, professional and intellectual growth;
· provide an education which contributes to the preparation of competent primary health care practitioners who, upon graduation from the Masters degree, are able to:
- apply osteopathic principles to formulate and prescribe suitable and safe management of patients;
- assess the health status of the patient, including physical, socio-economic and psychological factors;
· communicate with the patient and interact with other health
care providers and advisers for the benefit of the patient.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have completed the Victorian Certificate of Education (after not more than two attempts), or equivalent, Units 3 and 4 in Chemistry and one of Physics or Mathematics (any), with a study score of at least 20 in English. Applicants over the age of 21 who have not attempted an approved year 12 course in the three years prior to application may apply to enter the course but are still required to meet the prerequisite study hurdles.
Students will be required to undergo a Victoria Police check before commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for graduation.
Course Structure
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHA1171	ANATOMY 1	12	0.1250	3	$817	$1,021	$2,043
HHO1171	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHP1171	PHYSIOLOGY 1	12	0.0630	2	$351	$439	$782
HHU1171	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 1	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
RMS1171	BIOCHEMISTRY 1 (OSTEOPATHY)	12	0.0630	2	$351	$439	$782
RBF1170

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHA1272	ANATOMY 2	12	0.1250	3	$817	$1,021	$2,043
HHD1271	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 1	12	0.0630	2	$351	$439	$782
HHO1272	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 2	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHU1272	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 2	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHY1271	PATHOLOGY 1	12	0.0630	2	$351	$439	$782
RMS1272	BIOCHEMISTRY (OSTEOPATHY) 2	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783

Year Two
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHA2173	ANATOMY 3	12	0.0830	3	$542	$678	$1,356
HHC2171	BIOMECHANICS 1	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHD2172	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 2	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHO2173	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 3	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHP2172	PHYSIOLOGY 2	12	0.0630	2	$351	$439	$782
HHU2173	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 3	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHY2172	PATHOLOGY 2	12	0.0630	2	$351	$439	$782

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHA2274	ANATOMY 4	12	0.0830	3	$542	$678	$1,356
HHC2272	BIOMECHANICS 2	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHD2273	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHO2274	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 4	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHP2273	PHYSIOLOGY 3	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHU2274	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 4	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHY2273	PATHOLOGY 3	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783

Year Three (old structure: continuing students)
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHC3173	BIOMECHANICS 3	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHD3174	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS & MANAGEMENT 4 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 3	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHO3175	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 5	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHP3174	PHYSIOLOGY 4	12	0.0630	2	$351	$439	$782
HHS3171	PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 1	12	0.0630	1	$246	$308	$706
HHU3175	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 5	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHY3174	PATHOLOGY 4	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHA3275	ANATOMY 5	12	0.0630	3	$411	$514	$1,029
HHC3274	BIOMECHANICS 4	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHD3270	PROFESSIONAL ETHICS	12	0.0830	1	$325	$406	$931
HHO3276	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 6	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHP3275	PHYSIOLOGY 5	12	0.0630	2	$352	$440	$783
HHS3272	PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 2	12	0.0630	1	$247	$309	$707
HHU3276	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 6	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

*Total Semester Hours for Unit
Check subject details with course co-ordinator.
Clinical Training
For registration as an Osteopath, students must have completed the minimum clinical subject attendance requirements over the combined Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences and Master of Health Science - Osteopathy courses. Completion of the Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences course alone does not make graduates eligible for registration as Osteopaths.
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide continuity of patient care.
Clinic Website
www.omc.org.au
School Regulations
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty Regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University Statutes and Regulations.
Disciplinary FailURE
A student who has been awarded a fail in a subject on disciplinary grounds, e.g. for cheating, may not enrol in any further subjects in any major sequence of which the subject forms a part without the permission of the Faculty Progress Committee.
Graduation Requirements
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences, students must complete the hurdle clinical requirements.
Career Opportunities
Students will obtain knowledge and skills to equip them for professional careers as osteopaths in today's international market.
Professional Recognition
All graduates will be eligible for registration with the Osteopaths Registration Board of Victoria, and for registration as an osteopath in all other Australian states by mutual recognition with the Osteopaths Registration Board. Registered Osteopaths are also eligible for membership with other professional associations.

HBPA Bachelor of Health Science - Paramedic (ONE-year Conversion)
Bachelor of Health Science - Paramedic (ONE-year Conversion)
Course Code: HBPA
(This course is currently under review.)
Course Objectives
The aims of the course are to:
· provide a route to a degree qualification in paramedic practice for qualified paramedics who currently hold an Associate Diploma or equivalent;
· enhance the knowledge and skills of paramedics enabling them to function more effectively in their current practice;
· provide opportunities for paramedic practitioners to explore practice behaviours and attitudes in light of contemporary multicultural and multidisciplinary environments;
· stimulate paramedic practitioners to use problem solving skills when planning and implementing prehospital emergency care;
· produce graduate paramedics who can apply a research approach relevant to present practice;
· produce graduates who can examine current developments in paramedic practice and their implications for paramedics and paramedicine.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must:
· have an Associate Diploma of Health Science (Ambulance Officer), Diploma of Health Science (Paramedic), or equivalent; or
· be eligible for registration as a paramedic by the relevant body within the applicant's state or country of residence; and
· have a minimum of one-year post-qualification experience.
Course Duration
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent, as demand requires.
The course is offered on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent and is conducted completely via distance education using online teaching methodologies.
Course Structure
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB3111	PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB3222	INTEGRATION OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB3301	ISSUES IN PREHOSPITAL HEALTH SERVICE DELIVERY	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB3401	PREHOSPITAL ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB3122	PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB3211	INTEGRATION OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB3501	RESEARCH IN PARAMEDIC PRACTICE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Elective 12 3
General Electives
Student may choose an elective from any other higher education course offered by the University, subject to the approval of the Course Co-ordinator. Elective contact hours may be greater than three contact hours.
Recognition of Prior Learning/Credits/Units of Study Exemptions Students are required to complete eight subjects to satisfy course requirements. No recognition of prior learning is permissible.
Course Regulations
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty Regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University Statutes and Regulations.
Unsatisfactory Progress
Students may be asked to show cause why they should not be excluded from the course if they fail to complete the course within three calendar years full-time or six years part-time.

HGCM Graduate Diploma in Clinical Chinese Medicine
Graduate Diploma in Clinical Chinese Medicine
Course Code: HGCM
Course Objectives
The aims of the course are to:
· provide an opportunity for students to revise and consolidate their clinical knowledge in Chinese Medicine;
· develop and extend students' existing clinical experience;
· further students' knowledge of research design and methodology; and
· further students' knowledge of and skills in health counselling.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have successfully completed a three year Diploma in either Acupuncture or Chinese Herbal Medicine (including the relevant biomedical sciences) from a formal Chinese Medicine program; or equivalent.
Course Duration
The course is offered over one year on a full-time or part-time equivalent.
Course Structure
Students will complete 5 core subjects and will choose either Acupuncture or Chinese Herbal Medicine as their specialisation.
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHR0001
HHT5001	ADVANCED CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

plus Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream Units
Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHI5001
RFB5115	CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY & PATHOLOGY FOR CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553

or
Acupuncture Stream Units

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHK5001	SPORTS & MUSCULO-SKELETAL MEDICINE FOR ACUPUNCTURISTS	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
RBM5125

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT5002	RESEARCH PROJECT	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHT5003	COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR CHINESE MEDICINE PRACTICE	12	0.1250	1	$490	$612	$1,402
HHT5004	ADVANCED CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

plus either Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream Unit
Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHI5002

or
Acupuncture Stream Unit

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHK5002	GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS FOR ACUPUNCTURISTS	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

HGCT Graduate Diploma in Complementary Therapies
Graduate Diploma in Complementary Therapies
Course Code: HGCT
(This course is currently under review.)
Course Objectives
The course aims to provide students with the opportunity to:
· explore a range of conceptual and practical approaches to health and healing;
· develop innovative approaches to assisting individuals and groups in the healing process;
· develop skills in planning, implementing and evaluating complementary medicine and healing therapies;
· develop competence in a range of complementary medicine and healing therapies; and
· critically appraise a range of complementary medicine and healing therapies.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must hold an undergraduate degree, or equivalent qualification, in health, social sciences or education.
Applicants who, in pursuit of their occupation, or by other means recognised and approved by the School, can demonstrate their ability to undertake successful study at a postgraduate level may also apply for entry to the course.
Course Duration
The course is offered over two years on a part-time basis. Full-time study may be available depending on demand.
Course Structure
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHG5115	PHILOSOPHICAL CONCEPTS OF HEALING	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHG5125	THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS OF HEALING 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHG5135	HEALING 1: COLOUR, SOUND AND MOVEMENT	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHG5145	THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS OF HEALING 2	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553

Year Two
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHG5245	HEALING 2: TACTILE THERAPIES	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHR0001

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHG5255	HEALING 3: APPROACHES TO HEALING SKILLS	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHG5265	RESEARCH PROJECT	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553

HGPC Graduate Diploma in Prepared Chinese Medicines
Graduate Diploma in Prepared Chinese Medicines
Course Code: HGPC
Course Objectives
The course aims to:
· provide an opportunity for qualified Acupuncturists to establish and develop knowledge and skills in Chinese Herbal Medicine (CHM); and
· make available to qualified Acupuncturists a safe and effective adjunctive therapy to their practice of Acupuncture.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission applicants must hold a degree, or equivalent qualification, in Traditional Chinese Acupuncture, deemed appropriate by the School of Health Sciences.
Some applicants may be required to undertake a bridging course in academic skills.
Course Duration
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent.
Course Structure
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHH5105	INTRODUCTION TO CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH5115	CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY FOR HERBAL MEDICINE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH5125	FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH5135	FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHH5225	FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 3	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH5235	CLINICAL SPECIALITIES (PCM)	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HHH5245	PCM CLINICAL PRACTICUM	12	0.2500	2	$1,395	$1,744	$3,105

HMHM Master of Health Science (by Minor Thesis)
Master of Health Science (by Minor Thesis)
Course Code: HMHM
This course will appeal to health practitioners from a variety of disciplines who have a desire to further studies via a minor thesis in their particular area of practice.
These areas may include:
· Ambulance Services;
· Community Health;
· Emergency Services;
· Health Sciences;
· Mental Health Workers;
· Paramedic Sciences;
· Sociology of Health;
· Tactile Therapies;
· Culture Issues in Health;
· Gerontology - Aged Care Services; and
Women's Health.
Course Objectives
The aims of the course are to:
· provide opportunities for students to extend their knowledge and enable ongoing critical analysis of primary health care;
· encourage students' further investigation and reflection in a specific area of professional interest; and
· enhance students' ability to apply research knowledge in a collegial environment.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have satisfactorily completed, at an average grade level of second class honours (H2), a Graduate Diploma in Health Sciences, or equivalent, as approved by the School of Health Sciences.
Course Duration
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent.
Course Structure
Semester One
Full-time

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFR0001	ADVANCED QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS	16	0.1670	1	$655	$818	$1,874
HFR0002	ADVANCED QUALITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS	16	0.1670	1	$655	$818	$1,874
HHT1127	MINOR THESIS - FULLTIME	12	0.3330	2	$1,864	$2,330	$4,148

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHT1137	MINOR THESIS - FULLTIME	12	0.5000	2	$2,791	$3,489	$6,211

Part-time

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFR0001	ADVANCED QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS	16	0.1670	1	$655	$818	$1,874
HFR0002	ADVANCED QUALITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS	16	0.1670	1	$655	$818	$1,874
HHT1147	MINOR THESIS - PART-TIME	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHT1157	MINOR THESIS (PART-TIME)	12	0.2500	0	$980	$980	$2,802
HHT1158	MINOR THESIS PART-TIME	12	0.2500	0	$980	$980	$2,802
HHT1159	MINOR THESIS E PART-TIME	12	0.2500	0	$980	$980	$2,802

HMOS Master of Health Science - Osteopathy
Master of Health Science - Osteopathy
Course Code: HMOS
Course Objectives
The aims of this course are to equip graduates with:
· the diagnostic skills required by a primary health care practitioner;
· the ability to assess the health status of the patient, including physical, socio-economic and psychological aspects;
· the ability to formulate and prescribe a suitable and safe treatment program;
· skills in a full range of osteopathic techniques;
· an awareness of the application of osteopathic principles relevant to patient management;
· the ability to interact with other health care providers and advisers for the benefit of the patient, including an awareness of the need to gain informed consent;
· communication skills related to the patient and other persons, to maintain inter-professional co-operation and respect;
· an awareness of the cost effectiveness of osteopathic treatment;
· an awareness of the support systems that are available and an ability to take part in a multi-practitioner research program;
· an awareness of the need for continuing self education;
· clinical proficiency and an ability to manage all aspects of osteopathic patient care; and
· an awareness of their professional and personal responsibilities and an ability to effectively organise and manage their working environment.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have satisfactorily completed the Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences, or equivalent.
Students will be required to undergo a Victoria Police check before commencing clinical placement units. Police checks need to be conducted annually throughout the programme. Prospective and continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for graduation.
At the commencement of the course students must complete the Level 2 First Aid Certificate update.
Course Duration
The course is offered over two years on a full-time basis.
Course Structure
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHD4185	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 5	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHL4181	RESEARCH 1	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHO4187	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 7	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHS4183	PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCE 3	12	0.0830	1	$325	$407	$931
HHU4187	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 7	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHD4286	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 6	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHL4282	RESEARCH 2	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHO4288	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 8	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHU4288	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 8	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031
HHY4285	PATHOLOGY 5	12	0.0830	2	$463	$579	$1,031

Year Two
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHD5187	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 7	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHL5183	RESEARCH 3	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHO5189	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 9	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHU5189	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 9	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HHD5288	CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 8	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHL5284	RESEARCH 4	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHO5280	OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 10	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553
HHU5280	CLINICAL PRACTICUM 10	12	0.1250	2	$698	$872	$1,553

*Total Semester Hours for Unit
Check subject details with course co-ordinator.
Clinical Practicum
Clinical practicum is direct student/patient contact supervised by registered osteopaths and medical practitioners. In order to register as an osteopath, students must complete the minimum attendance requirements for clinical units over the full five years of the combined Bachelor of Science-Clinical Sciences and Master of Health Science-Osteopathy courses. This will be achieved cumulatively by an increasing commitment of time to clinically based learning as students progress through the course and their clinical skills increase. Clinical practicum during the Master degree consists of 324 hours in year one and 412 hours in year two (including holiday hours and external placement).
As the teaching clinics are required to operate 50 weeks per year, in order to maintain a public service and provide essential continuity of patient care, students will be expected to supplement any deficit in clinical practicum hours outside semester hours. The arrangement of clinical hours will be flexible and may vary from year to year dependent upon resources, patient availability and student development.
During the clinical practicum students will develop and enhance the following skills within the supervised clinical setting: interpersonal and communication skills; history taking; general observation; clinical methods; general medical and osteopathic examination; data analysis and interpretation; pathological diagnosis; radiological diagnosis; special investigations; osteopathic treatment and management; and professional behaviour and ethics.
Professional Recognition
Registration and regulation of osteopaths is a function of State Registration Boards in a similar way to the regulation of other health professions such as medicine and dentistry. Graduates of this course will be eligible to apply to be registered as osteopaths in Victoria. The course also has the support of the Australian College of Physical Medicine.

HRNS Master of Health Science (by Research)
Master of Health Science (by Research)
Course Code: HRNS
The School of Health Sciences offers the Master of Health Science (by Research). Staff are able to supervise research projects in a broad range of health and related areas, some of which are listed below. It is suggested that applicants explore their research interests with the Course Co-ordinator and contact with appropriate staff will be facilitated. A thesis on an approved topic will be required.
Areas of Specialisation
· Acupuncture;
· Ambulance Services;
· Chinese Herbal Medicine;
· Clinical Practice;
· Complementary Therapies;
· Cultural Issues and Health;
· Emergency Services;
· Health Administration;
· Health Counselling;
· Health Education;
· Natural Medicine;
· Osteopathic Medicine;
· Rehabilitation;
· Traditional Chinese Medicine;
· Western Herbal Medicine;
· Women's Health.
Course Duration
The course normally requires two years of full-time study or part-time equivalent.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the Master of Health Science (by Research) applicants must hold a degree in health science, or a related area, or equivalent, as approved by the School of Health Sciences.
Degree Requirements
The research thesis must be original work conducted under the supervision of the student advisor/s and with the approval of the Postgraduate Studies Committee of the University.
The thesis of the candidate will be examined externally by examiners of high academic standing in the area of the candidate's thesis topic.
Coursework may be required of candidates to further enhance the knowledge of a specific topic relevant to the field of study. Such coursework would run concurrent to the research.

HXPA Bachelor of Health Science - Paramedic (three-year Pre-service)
Bachelor of Health Science - Paramedic (three-year Pre-service)
Course Code: HXPA
(This course is currently under review.)
Course Objectives
The aims of this course are to produce graduates who can:
· identify, evaluate and manage the physical, psychological and social needs of patients and members of the community undergoing paramedic assessment, treatment and transport, and apply problem solving skills when planning and implementing out-of-hospital care;
· perform paramedic skills and techniques within paramedic protocols and apply paramedic knowledge necessary for safe, efficient and effective practice within paramedic environments;
· interpret the paramedic needs of patients and members of the community within a holistic framework and apply an integrated holistic approach in paramedic practice;
· perform effectively and safely as an independent person and as a member of a health care team in paramedic environments;
· be sensitive to contemporary issues within socially and culturally diverse communities and predict and respond effectively to such issues when providing paramedic practice;
· examine current research and developments in paramedic practice and evaluate their implications for paramedics and the profession.
Admission Requirements
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must normally have successfully completed the Victoria Certificate of Education (VCE), with Units 3 and 4 and a study score of at least 20 in English, or equivalent. Preference will be given to applicants who have successfully completed biology, physics or mathematics.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements but who possess appropriate educational qualifications, work or life experiences which would enable them to successfully undertake the course, will be considered for admission.
Students enrolled in the Bachelor of Health Science degree will be required to produce a current Victorian drivers' licence, and undergo a Victorian Police Check, a medical check and a physical capacity test before commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for graduation.
Course Duration
The course is offered on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent for Years One and Two only, and part-time only for Year Three. Clinical placements will be facilitated to suit individual needs of international students.
Course Structure
Year One
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB1101	FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB1102	PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB1801	OUT-OF-HOSPITAL PRACTICE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB1802	PREHOSPITAL CLINICAL	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB1203	PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB1204	PARAMEDIC CLINICAL 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB1205	FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB1206	PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Year Two
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB2100	PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB2101	PARAMEDIC CLINICAL 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB2102	FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 3	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB2103	PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 3	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB2204	PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 3	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB2205	PARAMEDICAL INTERNSHIP	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB2206	FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 4	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB2207	PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 4	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Year Three (Part-time only)
Semester One

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB3111	PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB3301	ISSUES IN PREHOSPITAL HEALTH SERVICE DELIVERY	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Two

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB3122	PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552
HFB3211	INTEGRATION OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Semester Three

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB3401	PREHOSPITAL ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Elective A 12 3
Semester Four

		Credit Point	EFTSL	SC Band	Pre 2005 (AU$)	From 2005 (AU$)	Full Fee (AU$)
HFB3501	RESEARCH IN PARAMEDIC PRACTICE	12	0.1250	2	$697	$872	$1,552

Elective B 12 3
General Electives
Students may choose electives from any other higher education courses offered by the University, subjects to the approval of the Course Co-ordinator, Elective contact hours may be greater than three contact hours.
Course Regulations
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty Regulations detailed earlier in this handbook, and the University Statutes and Regulations.
Unsatisfactory Progress
Students may be asked to show cause why they should not be excluded from the course if they fail to complete the course within seven calendar years on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent.
Graduate Requirements
In order to be awarded the degree Bachelor of Health Science-Paramedic, students must attain proficiency standard as stipulated by local industry guidelines in all paramedic practical assessments and must obtain an Upgraded Pass in all practical subjects. In order to be enrolled in Year Three, students must have successfully completed Years One and Two, or equivalent.
Career Opportunities
Students will obtain skills, knowledge and personal attributes necessary for employment in an ambulance service. The skills, knowledge and attributes should also provide graduates with a competitive advantage for selection and promotion in the paramedicine career pathways
Professional Recognition
All graduates are eligible to apply for membership of the Australian college of Ambulance Professionals.

XXXX Bachelor of Health Science - Chinese Medicine with Honours
Bachelor of Health Science - Chinese Medicine with Honours
To graduate with honours a student must:
(a) maintain grades of distinction 'D' or above in all graded subjects throughout 2nd, 3rd and 4th year of the program; and
(b) have satisfactory reports from all clinical teachers and supervisors throughout the four years of the program.
Articulation Pathways
Successful completion of the Bachelor of Health Science - Chinese Medicine allows direct articulation to various Graduate Diplomas and the Master of Health Science. Further articulation is then possible to the Doctor of Philosophy in Chinese Medicine.

Subjects

HFB1101 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 1
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject introduces the fundamentals of paramedicine. Students are introduced to the anatomical, physiological, biochemical, and pathophysiological basis of care from paramedic perspectives. Analysis of cell structures, types and groups culminates in examinations of the musculoskeletal and integumentary systems. Brief pathophysiological details from a limited range of acute and chronic conditions encountered by paramedics are also included. Topics studied in this subject may be interchangeable with those in HFB1205 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2, HFB2101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3 and HFB2206 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test given in two parts (20%); essay (1200 words) (30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB1102 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 1
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject is concerned with developing the students' understanding of the sciences underpinning paramedic practice. An introduction to microbiology and pharmacology related to paramedic practice provides the theoretical explanations for specific paramedic practices taught in later subjects. Pharmacological concepts such as route of administration, distribution, metabolism and excretion of drugs are introduced and developed with specific reference to paramedic practice. Topics studied in this subject may be interchangeable with those in HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2, HFB2101 Paramedic Sciences 3 and HFB2207 Paramedic Sciences 4.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Weekly online or workbook activities including one online test (Microbiology and Pharmacology combined) (30%); media review (1000 words) (20%); final written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (weekly activities and media review) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB1203 PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice and HFB1802 Prehospital Clinical 1; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HFB1204 Paramedic Clinical 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject builds on HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice and continues to develop the students' understanding and practice of paramedic emergency management. A problem-oriented approach extends students' paramedic knowledge and introduces paramedic protocols and practice requirements of individualizing patient care. Skill development is introduced and specifically integrated into particular paramedic medical and surgical case studies that highlight the nervous, respiratory, cardiovascular, and endocrine systems. Basic principles of applied clinical pharmacology, e.g., drug administration, and basic electrocardiology and interpretation and an introduction to advanced life support procedures including manual defibrillation are also included. Topics in this subject may be interchanged with HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2 and HFB2204 Paramedic Practice 3.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Proficiency multi-station practical and theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); portfolio (50%); final examination (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (multi-station examination and portfolio) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted multi-station examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on resubmission of the portfolio will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HFB1204 PARAMEDIC CLINICAL 1
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice and HFB1802 Prehospital Clinical; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to facilitate the application of theory and skills presented in HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1. Students participate in the delivery of health care initially in classroom laboratory settings and later in selected clinical settings. The clinical focus is on developing skills of assessment and care of people who require acute emergency medical and surgical care. Routes of medication administration are included and the nervous, respiratory, cardiovascular, and endocrine systems are presented in greater detail.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising at least sixty hours clinical placement in the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical placement needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions in hospitals, other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where possible, students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of their clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book; overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HFB1205 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 2
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject continues the topics presented in HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1 and introduces examinations of the anatomy, physiology and pathophysiology of the nervous, respiratory, cardiovascular and endocrine systems. Function is explored in detail from discrete, interactive and holistic perspectives. Topics studied in this subject may be interchanged with those in HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1, HFB2102 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3 and HFB2206 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care of the emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test given in two parts (20%); essay (1500 words) (30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB1206 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 2
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1102 Paramedic Sciences 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject presents the pharmacological aspects of dysfunction in the nervous, respiratory, cardiovascular and gastro-intestinal systems and relates those aspects to paramedic practice and out-of-hospital settings. The concept of host microbe interactions in microbiology introduces students to the body's defense systems and principles of disease and epidemiology. Topics studied in this subject may be interchangeable with those in HFB1102 Paramedic Sciences 1, HFB2103 Paramedic Sciences 3 and HFB2207 Paramedic Sciences 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Weekly workbook or online activities including one online test (Microbiology and Pharmacology combined) (30%); online test (20%); final written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (weekly activities and online test) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB1801 OUT-OF-HOSPITAL PRACTICE
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HFB1802 Prehospital Clinical; or equivalent.
Content This subject introduces students to out-of-hospital care and the paramedic profession. The subject is divided into three areas. The first area introduces modes of paramedic and out-of-hospital emergency and non-emergency practice. Ambulance operations including written communications in paramedicine, occupational health and safety issues, and an introduction to aspects of law and ethics are presented. The second area introduces paramedic diagnostics, emergency and non-emergency examinations, basic life support, and elementary management at a systems level of various medical and surgical conditions. The third area introduces trauma and its effects on the body. Throughout the subject, a problem-based learning model is used to promote development of critical thinking and individualized care is emphasized through assessment of patient priorities and care of their families.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Mid semester test (10%) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); proficiency multi-station practical and theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) (40%); written examination (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (mid semester test and multi-station examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standards must be obtained on any re-attempted mid semester test and multi-station examination. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HFB1802 PREHOSPITAL CLINICAL
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to facilitate the application of theory and skills presented in HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice. Students will participate in the delivery of health care in classroom laboratory settings and in selected clinical settings. The clinical focus is on developing skills related to assessment and care of people requiring elementary medical and surgical care, transport and prehospital attention.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten (10) hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising at least forty (40) hours clinical placement in the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical placement needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions in hospitals, other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where possible, students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of their clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book; overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HFB2100 PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HFB2101 Paramedic Clinical 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject continues to develop the students' understanding and practice of paramedic emergency management. A problem-oriented approach emphasizing application of knowledge guides students in trauma management and systems, environmental emergencies, introductory aeromedicine and major incident responses within specific medical specialties and out-of-hospital emergencies. Topics in applied clinical pharmacology will reinforce paramedic emergency management of patients at home and during emergency medical transport. To build individual and team skills and strengthen the awareness for individualized care, students will work with other students to provide supervised student mentoring. Topics in this subject may be interchanged with HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1 and HFB2204 Paramedic Practice 4.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or off-Campus equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Proficiency multi-station practical and theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); portfolio (50%); examination (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (multi-station examination and portfolio) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standards must be obtained on any re-attempted multi-station examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on resubmission of any portfolio will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HFB2101 PARAMEDIC CLINICAL 2
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB1204 Paramedic Clinical 1; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to facilitate the application of theory and skills presented in HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2. Students will participate in the delivery of health care in selected clinical settings and classroom laboratory practices. The clinical focus is on developing paramedic Assessment, competency and management of patients in a variety of circumstances.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten (10) hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising at least sixty (60) hours clinical placement in the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical placement needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions in hospitals, other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where possible, students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of their clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book; overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HFB2102 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 3
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1205 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2; or equivalent.
Content The subject builds on the earlier Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1 and 2, and includes the anatomy and physiology of the lymphatic, digestive, reproductive and urinary systems to illustrate their relationships within a range of common and important acute and chronic illnesses. An overview of human nutrition, metabolism and temperature regulation is included. Topics may be interchanged with those in HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1, HFB1205 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2 and HFB2206 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 4 subjects. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care of the emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test in two parts (20%); essay (1500 words) (30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB2103 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 3
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject introduces students to prescribed and over-the-counter drug treatments for endocrine and immunological disorders. Diagnosis and treatment of infections and inflammatory, neoplastic, and allergic conditions link the pharmacological and microbiological components of this subject. Topics studied in this subject may be interchangeable with those in HFB1102 Paramedic Sciences 1, HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2 and HFB2207 Paramedic Sciences 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Weekly workbook or online activities including one online test (Microbiology and Pharmacology combined) (30%); clinical review (1500 words) (20%); final written examination (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (weekly activities and clinical review) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB2204 PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 3
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject continues develop the students understanding and practice of paramedical emergency management. This subject has been designed to continue the study of knowledge using a problem-orientated approach. The introduction of skill development and knowledge has been specifically integrated to ensure students have an underlying knowledge and then are able to apply skills to a particular situation. The framework of this subject will be based around medical specialities and out of hospital emergencies and will be related to emergency care of the elderly, obstetrics and midwifery, neonatal care, paediatrics, abdominal and reproductive emergencies. Students will be introduced to the principles of applied clinical pharmacology in the form of paramedical guidelines, drug administration, and management of these patients in emergency situations, in the home and during emergency medical transport. Students will also be introduced to clinical instruction and mentoring. To enhance student relationships, students will work with other students providing supervised student mentoring arrangements. The integration of this approach will further facilitate the need for individualised patient care. Topics in this subject may be interchanged with HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1 or HFB2204 Paramedic Practice 3.Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or off Campus equivalent comprising lecturers, tutorials, practical sessions and discussion and/or workbooks. Assessment Examination (50%), Portfolio (50%)and mastery exams (pass/fail). Normally to obtain a pass in the subject all components of assessment must be passed. To obtain a pass in the subject all components of assessment must be successfully completed. If resubmission of the assignment or a supplementary examination is required for this subject, the total mark available for the task will be a maximum of 50%, and the overall grade for the subject will be no higher than pass.

HFB2205 PARAMEDICAL INTERNSHIP
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB2101 Paramedic Clinical 2; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HFB2204 Paramedic Practice 3; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to build on past clinical subjects and to place the student into actual paramedic practice. The subject aims to make students aware of the expectations of them in pre-hospital environments and acute medical settings. To further develop paramedic skills and an awareness of professional and ethical behaviours, students will be expected to practise primarily in the ambulance environment within selected clinical settings or in supervised classroom laboratory settings. Students will practise patient consultations and clinical practice under supervision. Clinical tutorials and case presentations will emphasize and expand upon clinically relevant material obtained during clinical placement.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten (10) hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising at least sixty (60) hours clinical placement in the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical placement needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions in hospitals, other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where possible, students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of their clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book; overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HFB2206 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 4
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB2102 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3; or equivalent.
Content This subject furthers the understanding of principles and diseases introduced in earlier paramedic subjects. Topics include the anatomy and physiology of the special senses; fluids, electrolytes and acid-base balance; and pregnancy and human development. The impacts of trauma and fluid and electrolytic imbalances on the body and the pathophysiological basis of pain and shock are presented. Fundamental differences between paediatric and adult care are highlighted. Students will study the acute paediatric onset of illnesses affecting the cerebral, respiratory, cardiovascular and other systems. Causes and prevention of paediatric trauma will be introduced and extended into its management in a prehospital setting. Emotional effects on parents, paramedics and bystanders will also be discussed. Topics may be interchanged with those in HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1, HFB1204 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2 and HFB2102 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care of the emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test given in two parts (20%); essay (1500 words) (30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB2207 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 4
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB2103 Paramedic Sciences 3; or equivalent.
Content This subject develops the students' knowledge on drugs used for CNS and psychiatric conditions and extends knowledge on fluid imbalances. Attitudes towards recreational and prescribed drugs are explored. Principles of microbiology with reference to sterilisation and disinfection, infection control and antibiotic treatment of microorganisms and nosocomial infections are linked to public health issues later in the course. Topics studied in this subject may be interchangeable with those in HFB1102 Paramedic Sciences 1, HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2 and HFB2103 Paramedic Sciences 3. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care of the emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Clinical review (1500 words) (20%); essay (1500 words) (30%); final written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (clinical review and essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB3111 PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject challenges students to analyse their present practice by examining the principles of intervention for the acutely ill or injured person. An integral part of this subject will be the development of students' health assessment and practice skills necessary to care for the acutely ill or injured person and the adoption of those skills to improve and extend current practice. Integration of material from basic and paramedic sciences, applied clinical sciences, paramedic clinical practice and professional issues will be incorporated throughout the subject.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%) To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HFB3122 PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject challenges students to analyse their present practice by examining the principles of intervention for the acutely ill or injured person. An integral part of this subject is the development of students' understanding of electrocardiology and pharmacology, and their ability to apply principles in electrocardiology and pharmacology to their present practice. Integration of material from basic and paramedic sciences, applied clinical sciences, paramedic clinical practice and professional issues will be incorporated throughout this subject.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio including contribution to online discussions (500-800 words each) (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HFB3211 INTEGRATION OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject will allow each student to extend and refine their particular area of professional paramedic practice. Students are expected to apply the principles developed in Professional Basis of Paramedic Practice 1 and 2 to their current paramedic practice and to concentrate on the professional development of their nominated area through observation, participation, discussion, and self-reflection.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HFB3222 INTEGRATION OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Restricted to students enrolled in the Bachelor of Health Science - Paramedic (1 yr Conversion) degree course.
Content This subject re-introduces and extends the fundamentals of paramedicine. A systems approach reinforces the anatomical, physiological, pathophysiological and pharmacological aspects of care from the perspectives of the paramedic. Applied considerations will be given to a range of adult and paediatric emergencies.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures and self-directed learning activities or online equivalent.
Assessment Essay (1500 words) (25%); weekly online activities including contributions to online discussions (15%); final online examination of multiple-choice questions only (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (essay and weekly activities) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HFB3301 ISSUES IN PREHOSPITAL HEALTH SERVICE DELIVERY
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject introduces students to a range of key concepts that influence health service delivery in out-of-hospital practice. Students will relate to their own perspectives and experiences in order to explore and analyse the many roles of the paramedic in health service delivery.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HFB3401 PREHOSPITAL ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject enables students to explore ethical and legal issues and their implications for paramedics and paramedicine. Students' experiences will be drawn upon to demonstrate and scrutinise their responses to common situations that occur in paramedic practice which may cause ethical and legal dilemmas.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Negotiated written report or portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the negotiated assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HFB3501 RESEARCH IN PARAMEDIC PRACTICE
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject investigates major research considerations and focuses on facilitating the students' abilities to critically analyse research reports. Emphasis is placed on the application of research findings to paramedic practice and ways in which applications can be facilitated.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Negotiated written report or portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the negotiated assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HFB3700 PARAMEDIC INSTRUCTION AND MENTORING (ELECTIVE)
(Offered in 2005 subject to demand)
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content The subject will introduce students to the concept of clinical precentorship, mentoring, instruction and action-based research in a paramedic focused settings. Students will plan and implement a specific activity based on a literature review and participation in professional practice. Students will be assisted to develop skills in goal and outcomes setting, data collection and interpretation of action research based on their clinical mentoring experience.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Negotiated written report or portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the negotiated assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HFB3800 PARAMEDIC PROFESSIONAL WRITING (ELECTIVE)
(Offered in 2005 subject to demand)
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject will introduce students to the practice of developing a paramedic body of knowledge through professional writing. Students will rely on their professional experience and the professional literature to produce a paper (or series of papers) suitable for submission to a refereed professional journal. Students will use publication guidelines and instructions to authors in paramedic or other suitable journals and will be assisted in the development of their journal paper(s). Emphasis will be on extending the students' critical appraisal, synthesis and higher order cognitive skills when developing their professional writing skills.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website relevant journal sites
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio or submission of a journal article (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HFB3700 PARAMEDIC INSTRUCTION AND MENTORING

HFB3800 PARAMEDIC PROFESSIONAL WRITING

HFB3900 EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE)
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or equivalents.
Content This subject examines two organizational areas (practices and functioning of organisations, and theories and models of organisational structure, policy and decision making) and how they relate to emergency medical services (EMS). Emphasis is on individuals within EMS organisational settings and the critical value of structure, policy and decision making to the organisation. Topics covered in the first area include personality, social perception, group dynamics, motivation and specific personal behaviour management issues such as stress management, conflict resolution and career management strategies. Topics in the second area include the nature of strategic planning, analysis of the environment, planning directions, strategy formulation and implementation, and global strategic management and future directions.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHA1171 ANATOMY 1
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Topics include definitions of anatomical terms; arthrology, osteology, angiology and myology; the somatic nervous system; autonomic nervous system; anatomy of the back, abdomen and thorax; respiratory muscles; the neck; the upper limb; clinical applications of musculoskeletal anatomy.
Required Reading Agur, A., & Dalley, A. F. (2005). Grant’s atlas of anatomy (11th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; Moore, K. L., & Dalley, A. F. (2005), Clinically oriented anatomy (5th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Recommended ReadingDrake, R. L., Vogl, W., & Mitchell, A. W. M. (2005). Gray’s anatomy for students. Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours Six (6)hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory practicals. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One 1-hour laboratory examination (50%); one 3-hour final written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. Failed assessment item (laboratory examination) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement.

HHA1229 ANATOMY 1

HHA1272 ANATOMY 2
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesSatisfactory completion of semester 1 of the HBOS degree; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Use anatomical language correctly to describe anatomical structures and planes and motions of the musculoskeletal system of the lower body;
2. Identify, name, and describe, the bones, muscles, ligaments, connective tissue structures, vessels, and nerves of the lower limb, thorax, abdomen, inguinal region and pelvis;
3. Identify the key anatomical structures and spaces of the lower body, thorax, abdomen,inguinal region and pelvis on models and cadaveric specimens;
4. Describe and define the somatic and autonomic nervous systems, and anatomical spaces of the lower limb, thorax, abdomen, inguinal region and pelvis;
5. Describe and demonstrate using cadaveric specimens the anatomical spaces and pathways of vessels and nerves of the lower limb, thorax, abdomen, inguinal region and pelvis;
6. Briefly comment on the clinical relevance of the key anatomical features of the lower body;
7. Demonstrate attributes in anatomical problem solving and clinical reasoning.
Content Topics include definitions of anatomical terms; arthrology, osteology, angiology and myology; the somatic nervous system; autonomic nervous system; anatomy of the back, abdomen and inguinal regions; the pelvis; the lower limb; clinical applications of musculoskeletal anatomy.
Required ReadingMoore, K. L., & Dalley, A. F. (2005). Clinically oriented anatomy (5th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Agur, A., & Dalley, A. F. (2005). Grant’s atlas of anatomy (11th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Drake, R. L., Vogl, W., & Mitchell, A. W. M. (2005). Gray’s anatomy for students. Churchill Livingstone. Netter, F. H. (1998). Interactive atlas of anatomy. USA: Icon Learning Systems. Rohen, J. W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen-Drecoll, E. (1998). Colour atlas of anatomy: A photographic study of the human body (4th ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins.
Class Contact Four (4) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory practicals. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); one 1-hour combined practical and oral examination (OSCE format) (50%) (hurdle requirement) ; one 2-hour final written examination (50%) (hurdle requirement).

HHA2173 ANATOMY 3
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHA1171 Anatomy 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to develop and consolidate knowledge acquired in HHA1171 Anatomy 1. Students study the embryological development of the major systems, visceral anatomy and histology. At the completion of the subject student will understand the embryonic development of all the major systems, gross anatomy of the head, neck, thorax, abdomen and pelvis and histology.
Recommended Reading As for HHA1171 Anatomy 1.
Subject Hours One 1-hour tutorial and one 1-hour laboratory session per week for two semesters.
Assessment Per semester - Laboratory exam 50%. Written exam 50%.

HHA2249 ANATOMY 2

HHA2274 ANATOMY 4
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHA2173 Anatomy 3; or equivalent those structures to lay and professional audiences.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Identify, name and describe anatomical structures within the abdomen and pelvis, including the fascia and nervous, vascular and lymphatic systems, from regional perspectives;
2. Describe the developmental processes and histology of all the major systems in the abdomen and pelvis, including the gastrointestinal, reproductive, urogenital systems;
3. Communicate knowledge of the anatomy of the abdomen and pelvis (including bones, vessels, fascia and spaces) to colleagues and to lay people in ways that each group can understand;
4. Explain the relationships amongst structure, function and dysfunction pertinent to regions of the abdomen and pelvis;
5. Relate the relevant anatomical structures within the abdomen and pelvis to osteopathic practice.

Content Visceral anatomy of the abdomen and pelvis, including the histology of visceral tissues. Embryological development of the major systems, including the neuromusculoskeletal system.
Required Reading Heath, J. W., & Young, B. (2000). Wheater’s functional histology (4th ed.). Churchill Livingstone. Kuchera, M. L., & Kuchera, W. A. (1994). Osteopathic considerations in systemic dysfunction (rev. ed.). Columbus, OH: Original Books. Moore, K. L., & Dalley, A. F. (2005). Clinically oriented anatomy (5th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Moore, K. L., & Persuad, T. V. N. (1993). The developing human (6th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co. Ryan, E. (2006). HHA2173 Anatomy 3 subject manual. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, Osteopathy Unit.
Recommended Reading Abrahams, P. H., Marks, S. C., & Hutchings, R. T. (2002). McMinn’s color atlas of human anatomy (5th ed.). UK: Mosby. Agur, A., & Dalley, A. F. (2005). Grant’s atlas of anatomy (11th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Clemente, C. D. (1997). Anatomy. A regional atlas of the human body (4th ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Drake, R. L., Vogl, W., & Mitchell, A. W. M. (2005). Gray’s anatomy for students. Churchill Livingstone. Rohen, J. W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen-Drecoll, E. (1998). Colour atlas of anatomy: A photographic study of the human body (4th ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Sinnatamby, C. S. (1999). Last’s anatomy (10th ed.). Churchill Livingstone. Snell, R. S. (2000). Clinical anatomy for medical students (6th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Class Contact Four (4) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory practicals. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); one practical viva voce examination (50%); one 3-hour final written examination (50%).

HHA3269 ANATOMY 3

HHA3275 ANATOMY 5
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHA2173 Anatomy 3, HHP2172 Physiology 2, or equivalent
Content This subject aims to expand on the knowledge gained in HHA1171 and HHA2249 Anatomy 1 and 2, and develop an appreciation of functional and radiographic, as well as static anatomy. By the end of the subject the students will, in addition to gaining an understanding of functional and relational anatomy, have developed dissecting skills for cadavers. content will include functional musculoskeletal anatomy. Clinically based learning involving clinical workshops and dissection of cadavers.
Required Reading As for HHA1129 Anatomy 1 and HHA2173 Anatomy 3.
Subject Hours Four hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lab sessions and self-directed study.
Assessment Written examination, 50%; practical examination, 50%.

HHC2171 BIOMECHANICS 1
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
Prerequisites nil.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to: 1. Define and use correctly basic biomechanical terminology and principles;
2. Discuss basic biomechanical principles in relation to osteopathic practice;
3. Describe using general concepts, the structure and function of the components of joints;
4. Explain the functions of the various joints and tissues in the human body;
5. Comment on laboratory analysis techniques in kinetics, kinematics and gait.
Content Introduction to biomechanical principles and general applications to osteopathic practice. Biomechanical principles, term, definitions. Kinematics and kinetics. Levers, moments and torque. Analysis of joints (general type, structure and function). Applications of data collection and analysis. Mechanics of biological tissue: bone, muscle, ligament, cartilage.
Required Reading Norkin, C. C., & Levangie, P. K. (2001). Joint structure and function: A comprehensive analysis (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company.
Recommended Reading Enoka, R. (2002). Neuromechanical basis of kinesiology (3rd ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishers. Kreighbaum, E., & Barthels, K. M. (1996). Biomechanics: A qualitative approach for studying human movement (4th ed.). Minneapolis, MN: Burgess Publishing Company. Luttgens, K., & Wells, K. F. (1982). Kinesiology: Scientific basis of human motion (7th ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders College Publishing. Neumann, D. A. (2002). Kinesiology of the musculoskeletal system. Sydney, Australia: Mosby.
Class Contact Three (3) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory practicals. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); five (5) laboratory reports (10% each, total 50%); one 1-hour final written examination (50%).

HHC2272 BIOMECHANICS 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHA1171 Anatomy 1; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Discuss in detail the biomechanics of major joints;
2. Describe joint injury mechanics peculiar to each joint;
3. Predict common causes of injury to each joint;
4. Demonstrate laboratory analysis techniques in a biomechanics laboratory;
5. Critically assess published research papers on mechanics of the body and its joints.

Content Biomechanical analysis of specific joints in the human thorax and spine, hip, shoulder, knee and ankle. Analysis of joint components, muscles and passive structures peculiar to each joint, and an overview of injury-related issues peculiar to each joint. Students will research one specific topic area
Required Reading Norkin, C. C., & Levangie, P. K. (2001). Joint structure and function: A comprehensive analysis (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company.
Recommended Reading Enoka, R. (2002). Neuromechanical basis of kinesiology (3rd ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishers. Kreighbaum, E., & Barthels, K. M. (1996). Biomechanics: A qualitative approach for studying human movement (4th ed.). Minneapolis, MN: Burgess Publishing Company. Luttgens, K., & Wells, K. F. (1982). Kinesiology: Scientific basis of human motion (7th ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders College Publishing. Neumann, D. A. (2002). Kinesiology of the musculoskeletal system. Sydney, Australia: Mosby.
Class Contact Three (3) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory practicals.
Assessment Class quizzes (total 30%); one 10-minute video presentation (30%), one 2-hour final written examination (40%).

HHC2819 BIOMECHANICS 1

HHC3173 BIOMECHANICS 3
CampusSt Albans, City flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHC2272 Biomechanics 2; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Apply biomechanical principles and knowledge of anatomy to common activities;
2. Apply biomechanical principles to the analysis of daily and other specified activities;
3. Apply appropriate laboratory-based methods to analyse those activities;
4. Orally present individual biomechanics research findings in a seminar setting.

Content Application of biomechanics to daily living and common activities. Gait, posture, ergonomics, lifting. Walking and running injuries; shoulder - throwing and injuries; sport biomechanics.
Required Reading Norkin, C. C., & Levangie, P. K. (2001). Joint structure and function: A comprehensive analysis (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company. (Relevant Chapters on Gait and Posture.)
Recommended Reading Enoka, R. (2002). Neuromechanical basis of kinesiology (3rd ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishers. Kreighbaum, E., & Barthels, K. M. (1996). Biomechanics: A qualitative approach for studying human movement (4th ed.). Minneapolis, MN: Burgess Publishing Company. Luttgens, K., & Wells, K. F. (1982). Kinesiology: Scientific basis of human motion (7th ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders College Publishing. Neumann, D. A. (2002). Kinesiology of the musculoskeletal system. Sydney, Australia: Mosby.
Class Contact Three (3) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); seminar questions (40%), one 2-hour written examination (60%).

HHC3274 BIOMECHANICS 4
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHC3173 Biomechanics 3; or equivalent
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Integrate different knowledge aspects of biomechanics;
2. Replicate a research study in biomechanics, applying knowledge and skills acquired in earlier semesters;
3. Present orally individual or group research to colleagues and to lay people in ways that each group can understand;
4. Produce written reports of individual or group research in a conventional scientific format.
Content The research process in biomechanics. Replication of a published study in the biomechanics literature. Reliability and validity of test data. Written and oral presentations of the student’s biomechanics research project.
Required Reading There are no set texts for this unit. Reading will be influenced by the nature the research project undertaken by the student. American Psychological Association. (2001). Publication manual of the American Psychological Association (5th ed.). Washington, DC: Author.
OR
APA Style Sheet. (2004). Available from Dr. Abel Scribe PhD Web site, www.docstyles.com/apacrib.htm
Recommended Reading Aron, A., & Aron, E. N. (1999) Statistics for psychology (2nd ed.). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Three (3) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising laboratory classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); one oral research presentation (40%), one written research report (60%).

HHC3829 BIOMECHANICS 2

HHC5531 CLINICAL PRACTICE 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of the subject is to introduce students to osteopathic healthcare in the clinical setting, initially by observation of osteopathic practice, and later by the use of osteopathic diagnosis and treatment in their own practices. By the end of the subject students should be developing the ability to apply osteopathic concepts of diagnosis and treatment to their own patients in a clinical setting. content will include: Introduction to osteopathic clinical practice. To initially observe the osteopathic approach to health care provision and later apply osteopathic principles to the assessment and treatment of patients in their own practices. Clinical application of skills and attributes developed in the subjects: Osteopathic History & Principles 1, Osteopathic Diagnosis 1, Osteopathic Technique 1. Review of clinical cases by preparation and presentation of the clinical case book. Integration of medical and osteopathic approaches to patients with musculoskeletal pain and/or dysfunction. Supervised interaction and treatment of patients in the osteopathic medicine clinic and by mentoring with registered osteopathic practitioners in their own and osteopathic practices in their locality.
Required Reading Greenman P (1989) Principles of Manual Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore; Stoddard A (1983) Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London; Ward RC (Editor) (1997) Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams and Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E (1991) An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia.
Subject Hours City Campus clinic attendance @ 8 hours per residential unit (2 residential units per annum). Practice based learning 108 hours per annum. Practice based learning comprises: 36 hours of fieldwork spent with registered osteopathic practitioners completed over the year. There will be a close supervisory/mentoring relationship between selected local osteopathic practitioners and the student. 72 hours in their own practices applying osteopathic principles to the care of patients. Detailed casebooks will be kept outlining the presentation, examination, assessment, diagnosis, treatment, and outcomes. Each case will require discussion of osteopathic principles and practice referenced to standard osteopathic and medical texts, and research literature.
Assessment Evidence of completion of hours, satisfactory reports from supervisors/mentors, examination of case-studies x 8, 100%

HHC5532 CLINICAL PRACTICE 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1, HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to consolidate the students' ability to work with osteopathic diagnosis and treatment techniques in a clinical setting, and to integrate the knowledge acquired in all subjects of the course. By the end of this subject the students should have the skills necessary to begin using osteopathic approaches on a regular basis with patients in their own clinics, and also have the necessary knowledge to pursue further postgraduate studies in osteopathy. content will include: Continuation of clinical practice subject allowing further development and refinement of osteopathic clinical skills in relation to the provision of patient care. Reinforcement of integrated clinical thought processes in the provision of holistic health care. Full case 'work ups' with oral presentations to peers. Integration of all academic course elements to provide for the provision of osteopathic health care to the benefit of patients.
Subject Hours City Campus clinic attendance @ 8 hours per residential unit (one residential unit). Practice based learning 80 hours per annum. Practice based learning comprises: 36 hours of fieldwork spent with registered osteopathic practitioners completed over the year. There will be a close supervisory/mentoring relationship between selected local osteopathic practitioners and the student. 44 hours in their own practices applying osteopathic principles to the care of patients. Detailed casebooks will be kept outlining the presentation, examination, assessment, diagnosis, treatment, and outcomes. Each case will require discussion of osteopathic principles and practice referenced to standard osteopathic and medical texts, and research literature.0
Assessment Examination of case-studies x 6, 30%; Final clinical practice examination, 70% - short cases - long case - objective structured clinical exam.

HHD1100 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS 1

HHD1271 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will enable students to develop skills in Basic History taking, and the examination and assessment of the following: mental status, skin, head and neck, eye and ear, pulmonary system, heart, peripheral vascular system, cranial nerves, abdomen, peripheral nervous system, musculoskeletal system. Training in the use of equipment employed in clinical examinations, including the: stethoscope, otoscope, ophthalmoscope, reflex hammer, tuning fork, and sphygmomanometer.
Required Reading Bickley L, 1999 Bates' Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking 7th Ed. Lippincott Publishers; Dorland W. A. N. 2000, Dorland's Illustrated Medical Dictionary 29th Ed. W B Saunders Co
Recommended Reading Hoppenfeld S 1976 Physical Examination of the Spine and Extremities Appleton-Century-Crofts, New York. Seidel H 2003 Mosby's Guide to Physical Examination 5th Ed. Mosby-Year Book. Swash M. 2002 Hutchison's Clinical Methods. 21st Ed. W B Saunders Co
Subject Hours Semester Two: Lecture: one hour per week; Practical: one hour per week
Assessment Practical/viva voce: 100%.

HHD2172 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 2
Campus Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
Prerequisites HHD1172 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 1; HHY1271 Pathology 1; or equivalents.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to: 1. Describe common and serious clinical scenarios in the haematological, cardiovascular, renal and urogenital systems;
2. Demonstrate appropriate examination skills relevant to the cardiovascular, renal and urogenital systems;
3. Recognise symptoms or signs that warrant referral to another practitioner including those that require immediate referral; 4. Describe and use the communication skills involved in the consultative process;
5. Discuss models of clinical judgment used by a practising General Practitioner in relation to their own clinical experience;
6. Explain the appropriate applications of and typical pathological findings from widely employed laboratory, radiological and other special investigations of the haematological, cardiovascular, renal and urogenital systems.
Content Clinical presentations of common and life-threatening diseases affecting the haematological, cardiovascular, renal and urogenital systems will be discussed. The unit features common clinical scenarios with clinical examination of those scenarios, and the common laboratory and radiological tests used in the investigations of those systems. Particular emphasis will be given to conditions that are of special interest to osteopaths.
Required Reading Bickley, L. S. (2004). Bates' guide to physical examination and history taking (8th. ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Fitzgerald, K., & Kiatos, J. (2006). HHD2172 CD&M 2 and HHD2273 CD&M 3 unit manual. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, Osteopathy Unit.
Recommended Reading Haslett, C., Chilvers, E. R., Boon, N. A., Colledge, N. & Hunter, J. A. (2003). Davidson’s principles and practice of medicine (19th ed.). Churchill Livingstone. Longmore, J., Wilkinson, I., & Rajagopalan, S. (2004). Oxford handbook of clinical medicine (6th ed.). Oxford: OUP. Murtagh, J. (2003). General practice (3rd ed.). Sydney, Australia: McGraw-Hill. Newman Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co. Pagana, K. D., & Pagana, T. J. (2006). Mosbys manual of diagnostic and laboratory tests (3rd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Upfal, J., & O’Callaghan, J. (2003). Your medical tests: What do they really mean? Australia: Penguin.
Class Contact Four (4) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment One 15-minute practical examination (35%); one 2-hour written examination (65%).

HHD2201 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS 2

HHD2273 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
PrerequisitesHHD2172 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 2; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Describe common and serious clinical scenarios in the respiratory, gastrointestinal and endocrine systems;
2. Demonstrate appropriate examination skills relevant to the respiratory, gastrointestinal and endocrine systems;
3. Recognise symptoms or signs that warrant referral to another practitioner including those that require immediate referral;
4. Describe and use the communication skills involved in the consultative process;
5. Discuss models of clinical judgment used by a practising General Practitioner in relation to their own clinical experience;
6. Explain the appropriate applications of and typical pathological findings from widely employed laboratory, radiological and other special investigations of the respiratory, gastrointestinal and endocrine systems.
Content Clinical presentations of common and life-threatening diseases affecting the respiratory, gastrointestinal and endocrine systems will be discussed. The unit features common clinical scenarios with clinical examination of those scenarios, and the common laboratory and radiological tests used in the investigations of those systems. Particular emphasis will be given to conditions that are of special interest to osteopaths.
Required Reading Bickley, L. S. (2004). Bates' guide to physical examination and history taking (8th. ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Fitzgerald, K., & Kiatos, J. (2006). HHD2172 CD&M 2 and HHD2273 CD&M 3 unit manual. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, Osteopathy Unit.
Recommended Reading Haslett, C., Chilvers, E. R., Boon, N. A., Colledge, N. & Hunter, J. A. (2003). Davidson’s principles and practice of medicine (19th ed.). Churchill Livingstone. Longmore, J., Wilkinson, I., & Rajagopalan, S. (2004). Oxford handbook of clinical medicine (6th ed.). Oxford: OUP. Murtagh, J. (2003). General practice (3rd ed.). Sydney, Australia: McGraw-Hill. Newman Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co. Pagana, K. D., & Pagana, T. J. (2006). Mosbys manual of diagnostic and laboratory tests (3rd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Upfal, J., & O’Callaghan, J. (2003). Your medical tests: What do they really mean? Australia: Penguin.
Class Contact Four (4) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment One practical examination (35%); one 2-hour written examination (65%).

HHD3000 HEALTH SCIENCE 1
CampusSt Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHD3110 Dermal Techniques 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject will introduce students to theoretical aspects of anatomy, physiology, pathophysiology, microbiology, immunology, chemistry, cosmetic dermatology, cellular damage, immunity, allergy inflammation, wound repair, neoplasia and tissue responses to stress relevant to the practice of Dermal Therapy. The subject will provide important underpinning knowledge that students will require in their practical applications throughout the degree program. Knowledge to be developed will include: wound rehabilitation, skin and deeper tissue physiology, inflammatory response and associated damage, identification and biochemistry of micro-organisms, allergic response inflammation, composition of cosmetics and the range of aesthetic-based skin diseases that can be dealt with by the Dermal Therapist.
Required Reading Rotstein, H., Delauney, W. E., & Land, W. A. (1993). Principles and practice of dermatology (3rd ed.). Sydney: Butterworth. Tortora, G., & Grabowski, S. (1996). Principles of anatomy and physiology. New York: Harper Collins.
Recommended Reading Caswell, A. (1998). MIMS annual. (27th ed.). St. Leonards, NSW: Multimedia. Fitzpatrick, T. B., Johnson, R. A., Wolff, K., Polano, M. K., & Suurmond, D. (1997). Colour atlas and synopsis of clinical dermatology. (3rd ed.). USA: McGraw-Hill. Gawkrodger, D. J. (1997). Dermatology an illustrated coloured text. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Rohen, J. W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll, E. (1993). Colour atlas of anatomy. (4th ed.). Baltimore: Williams and Wilkins.
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Reading exercises (20%); research assignment (1500 words) (20%); final examination (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (research assignment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHD3002 HEALTH SCIENCE 2
CampusSt Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) HHD3000 Health Science 1; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHD3220 Dermal Techniques 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject will build on the knowledge base covered in Health Science 1 by further researching advanced skin structure and cosmetic dermatology, specifically in the area of dermatological conditions that develop as a result of cosmetic substances put on the skin. This subject will also cover the management of non-infectious dermatological conditions such as dermatitis, eczema, psoriasis, benign and pre-malignant skin lesions and skin cancers. A large range of vascular skin disorders and nail diseases will also be considered. This will lead into related pharmacology and toxicology areas and will include studies of the effects of various drugs and chemicals, both topical and oral, on the skin. Students will also be expected to investigate the effects on the skin of various cosmetic ingredients especially those in chemical peels and herbal preparations. In addition to this, students will be expected to become familiar with the Therapeutic Goods Act and other legislation relevant to their practical work.
Required Reading Rotstein, H., Delauney, W. E., & Land, W. A. (1993). Principles and practice of dermatology (3rd ed.). Sydney: Butterworth. Tortora, G., and Grabowski, S. (1996). Principles of anatomy and physiology. New York: Harper Collins. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, www.tga.gov.au/docs/html
Recommended Reading Caswell, A. (1998). MIMS annual. (27th ed.). St. Leonards NSW: Multimedia. Fitzpatrick, T. B., Johnson, R. A., Wolff, K., Polano, M. K., & Suurmond, D. (1997). Colour atlas and synopsis of clinical dermatology. (3rd ed.). USA: McGraw-Hill. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied health professionals (4th ed.). Australia: Pearson Education. Gawkrodger, D. J. (1997). Dermatology an illustrated coloured text. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Rohen, J. W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll, E. (1993). Colour atlas of anatomy. (3rd ed.). Baltimore: Williams and Wilkins.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Essay (2000 words) (25%); reading exercises (20%); class presentation (25%); final examination (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHD3100 CLINICAL PRACTICE 1
CampusSt Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) HHD3000 Health Science 1; HHD3110 Dermal Techniques 1; or equivalents.
Content In this subject students will be introduced to theoretical aspects of specific medical and therapeutic procedures. Medical and aesthetic reasons for a range of approaches will be outlined. Students will observe a representative range of face and body procedures related to the lectures. In addition, students will develop theatre and sterile techniques including dressings, personal preparation for theatre and setting up for minor cosmetic or aesthetic procedures. Topics include, medical terminology, wound management, infection, infection control, asepsis, sterilization, complications of wound healing, wound redressing, compression bandages and equipment, eye toilets, complications from bandaging and eye toilets, a review of first aid procedures, gloving and gowning, latex allergy, proper documentation and a review of common procedures in cosmetic surgery.
Required Reading Meers, P., McPherson, M., & Sedgewick, J. (1997). Infection control in health care. Cheltenham, UK: Starley Thornes. Rohen, J W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll, E. (1993). Colour atlas of anatomy. (4th ed.). Baltimore, USA: Williams and Wilkins.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Class exercises (20%); case study assignment (2000 words) (30%); final examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (case study assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHD3102 RESEARCH PERSPECTIVES AND PRACTICES
CampusCity King, St. Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHD3002 Health Science 2; HHD3220 Dermal Techniques 2; or equivalents.
Content This subject provides an introductory research focus for health care professionals with an emphasis on quantitative and qualitative paradigms. A primary aim of this introductory research subject will be to facilitate the students' ability to critically analyse and evaluate selected research literature relating to health sciences with particular reference to the safe practice of applied dermal therapies. An introduction to the experimental method, basic quantitative and qualitative analytical techniques, case study reports, report writing and ethics in research will also be covered.
Required Reading Polgar, S., & Thomas, S. (2000). Introduction to research in the health sciences. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Abbott, P., & Sapsford, R. (1998). Research methods for nurses and the caring professionals (2nd ed.). Buckingham, UK: Open University Press. Burns, N., & Grove, S. (1993). The practice of nursing research: Conduct, critique and utilisation. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders. Hood, S., Mayall, B., & Oliver, S. (Eds.). (1998). Critical issues in social research. Buckingham, United Kingdom: Open University Press. Jenkinson, C. (1997). Assessment and evaluation of health and medical care. Buckingham, United Kingdom: Open University Press.
Subject Hours Two hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignment (1500 words) (50%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHD3103 NUTRITION FOR HEALTH AND WELL-BEING
CampusCity King, St. Albans
Prerequisite(s) Students must have satisfactorily completed the first two semesters of coursework for the degree Bachelor of Health Science - Applied Dermal Therapies; or equivalent.
Content The aim of this subject is to build upon student's knowledge of nutrition as presented in the Diploma program and consolidated through 'work experience'. In this subject students will further their understanding of the role of various vitamins/minerals, food groups and nutritional supplements in healing and well-being. Students will also study the beneficial and deleterious effects of various diets on skin health and the relationship of nutrition and eating patterns to conditions such as anorexia, bulimia and obesity. Attention will be given to factors which promote nutritional well-being, conditions in which it is appropriate to provide nutritional advice to clients and the identification of situations in which it is necessary to refer clients to specialist health practitioners. Topics include carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, energy balance, water soluble vitamins, fat soluble vitamins, minerals, dieting, how to recognize the relationship between dieting disorders and skin conditions, referrals, nutritional status of skin, discussions on popular diets- advantages & disadvantages, client management of specific dieting needs in respect of vitamins and minerals, the effects of excessive amounts of vitamins and minerals.
Required Reading Koch, M. (1991). Laugh with health. Ulmarra, NSW: Renaissance & New Age Creations.
Recommended Reading Dunn, L. (1990). Nutrition almanac. New York: McGraw-Hill. Edlin, G., Golanty, E., & McCormack Brown, K. (2002). Health and wellness. (7th ed.). USA: Jones & Bartlett Pub. Hall, D. (1976). The natural health book. Australia: Penguin Books. Pritchford, P. (1993). Healing with whole foods. Berkley, CA: North Atlantic Books. Thomas, B. (1996). Nutrition in primary care. Blackwell Science Inc. Thomson, C., & Ritehbaugh, C. (Eds.). (1996). Preventative and therapeutic nutrition handbook. Chapman & Hall.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment One written assignment (1500 words) (40%); one 2-hour examination (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHD3104 GRADUATING SEMINAR
CampusCity King, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Students must have satisfactorily completed the first two semesters of coursework for the degree Bachelor of Health Science - Clinical Dermal Therapies; or equivalent.
Content Graduating Seminar is an integrating subject for the course and has been designed to provide students with a framework to link the main elements of the course. The subject enables students to enhance their critical thinking and integration of knowledge. Particular emphases will be given to 1) ethical and legal issues and dilemmas confronting dermal therapies and 2) networking with medical practitioners and other health professionals including referrals and approaches to establishing effective and safe working relationships. 3) Presenting research findings and clinical results.
Required Reading Covey, S. (1990). The 7 habits of highly effective people. New York: Simon and Schuster.
Recommended Reading Ashmore, R. (Ed.). (1997). Self and identity. New York: Oxford University Press. Covey, S., Merrill, A., & Merrill, R. (1997). First things first. Sydney: Simon and Schuster. Germou, U. (Ed.). (1997). Second opinion: An introduction to health sociology. Sydney: Oxford University Press. Johnstone, M. (1994). Bio-ethics: A nursing perspective. Sydney: W. B. Saunders. Petersen, A., & Waddell, C. (Eds.). (1998). Health matters: A sociology of illness, prevention and care. Buckingham, UK: Open University Press. Weston, R., Martin, T., & Anderson, Y. (Eds.). (1998). Loss and bereavement: Managing change. London: Blackwell Science.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising two hours of lectures and one hour seminar.
Assessment Public presentation (50%); research article (2500 words) (40%); ethics examination 10%. To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (research article and examination) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%.

HHD3110 DERMAL TECHNIQUES 1
CampusSt Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHD3000 Health Science 1 or equivalent.
Content The subject will enhance the student's knowledge and practice of advanced manual and machine dermal therapies. This will consist of micro-dermabrasion and clinical lymphatic drainage. The basis of these therapies will be investigated and recommended regimes established. Skills will be developed in the application of advanced massages and electrical equipment techniques appropriate to the needs of the client/patient. In addition, this subject will introduce the concepts of treatment sequencing, planning and reappraisals with special emphasis on peri-operative services.
Required Reading Kurz, I. (1982). Introduction to Dr Vodder's manual lymph drainage - manual of Dr Vodder's manual lymph drainage. (Vol. 1). Basic course (2nd Rev. ed.). Heidelberg: Haug Publishers. Pierantoni, H. (1986). Treatments of the face - practical manual of esthetics (Vol. 2). USSR: H. Pierantoni & Les Nouvelles Esthetics. Prentice, W. F. (1998). Therapeutic modalities for allied health professionals. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Physiotherapists Registration Act, (1978~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, www.health.vic.gov.au/legislation/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Micro-dermabrasion exam (50%); practical lymphatic exam (50%). Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHD3174 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS & MANAGEMENT 4 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 3
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHD2273 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 3; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Use at proficiency level the vocabulary of the musculoskeletal examination;
2. Discuss the fundamentals of history as they pertain to musculoskeletal disease;
3. Explain key diagnostic procedures, tests and investigations employed in rheumatology;
4. Conduct a competent examination of the following joints and their associated musculature and accessory structures such as bursae, menisci and ligaments: shoulder, elbow, wrist, hand, hip, knee, ankle and foot;
5. Use a diagnostic algorithm to arrive at a differential diagnosis;
6. Recognise the main classes of bone tumours and their specific clinical manifestations;
7. Integrate knowledge previously presented in anatomy and physiology and apply this integrated knowledge to the living body;
8. Demonstrate competent usage of the basic tools associated with clinical examinations of the shoulder, elbow, wrist, hand, hip, knee, ankle and foot.
Content The clinical examination of the musculoskeletal system of the human body in detail. Students will be specifically trained in the advanced examination of the joints and the associate muscles at the shoulder, elbow, wrist, hand, hip, knee, ankle and foot. Key diagnostic procedures, tests and investigations used to diagnose pathology of the joints, bones and connective tissues will be discussed. Students will be trained in the use of a detailed diagnostic algorithm for the diagnosis of musculoskeletal conditions. These skills will be contextualised in terms of the main diseases affecting the musculoskeletal system. Skills required for advanced usage of typical equipment employed in the musculoskeletal examination will be refined.
Required Reading Kiatos, J. (2006). HHD3174 CD&M 4 unit manual. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, Osteopathy Unit. Newman Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co.
Recommended Reading Bickley, L. S. (2004). Bates' guide to physical examination and history taking (8th. ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Longmore, J., Wilkinson, I., & Rajagopalan, S. (2004). Oxford handbook of clinical medicine (6th ed.). Oxford: OUP. Magee, D. J. (2002). Orthopedic physical assessment (4th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co. Murtagh, J. (2003). General practice (3rd ed.). Sydney, Australia: McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Two (2) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and practical tutorials. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment One practical examination (40%); one 2-hour written examination (60%).

HHD3200 CLINICAL PRACTICE 2
CampusCity King, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHD3100 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content In this subject students will begin to focus on a specific range of medical and therapeutic procedures with a view to specialisation of peri-operative support using clinical dermal therapy techniques. Students will be expected to work in a case management context under the supervision of a selected practitioner through a mentoring arrangement. Topics include: further procedures in cosmetic surgery; complications of cosmetic procedures; using ultrasound and micro currents; diathermy, pressotherapy for post liposuction; radio therapy with cosmetic surgeons; galvano therapy and other therapies that can enhance surgical outcomes.
Required Reading Meers, P., McPherson, M., & Sedgewick, J. (1997). Infection control in health care. Cheltenham, UK: Starley Thornes. Rohen, J. W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll, E. (1993). Colour atlas of anatomy (4th ed.). Baltimore, USA: Williams and Wilkins.
Subject Hours A minimum of (48) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Successful completion of required 48 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); presentation of case studies (60%); final examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHD3220 DERMAL TECHNIQUES 2
CampusSt Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) HHD3110 Dermal Techniques 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject will build on the knowledge and techniques covered in Dermal Techniques 1. Students will undertake study in the basics of low and high level laser together with practical applications. This will include an introduction to laser and light physics, laser & light tissue interaction, laser safety, introduction to intense pulsed light, resurfacing lasers, light based treatment of hair, practical aspects of light based hair removal, light based treatment of vascular & pigmented lesions and tattoos, photo rejuvenation, practical aspects of photo rejuvenation and light based treatment of acne. A number of case studies based on treatment planning, skin analysis, acne management, scar management and ageing skin management will also be presented. They will apply a range of techniques and treatment regimes to affect successful outcomes for the client. Students will also be expected to consider the psychological and physiological needs of the client.
Required Reading Kurz, I. (1982). Introduction to Dr Vodder's manual lymph drainage - manual of Dr Vodder's manual lymph drainage (Vol. 1). Basic course (2nd Rev. ed.). Heidelberg: Haug Publishers. Pierantoni, H. (1986). Treatments of the face - practical manual of esthetics. (Vol. 2). USSR: H. Pierantoni & Les Nouvelles Esthetics. Prentice, W. F. (1998). Therapeutic modalities for allied health professionals. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Physiotherapists Registration Act, (1978~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, www.health.vic.gov.au/legislation/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Practical assessment (50%); assignment (2000 words) (30%); final examination (20%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHD3270 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS

HHD3301 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS 3

HHD3330 DERMAL TECHNIQUES 3
CampusSt Albans or City King.
Prerequisite(s) HHD3220 Dermal Techniques 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject builds on techniques covered in Dermal Techniques 1 and 2 by further developing treatment planning and sequencing as part of case management. This will occur through the on-going evaluation of treatments in progress and final evaluation of completed treatments. Practical application of advanced dermal treatment techniques will be undertaken. Specific techniques used to support the clinical procedures will be used this includes micro-pigmentation and further practice in laser therapy, micro-dermabrasion, , specialised lymphatic drainage massage and chemical peels. Further study into the pharmacology of topical medication and use of drugs/chemicals, cosmetic chemistry, factor of penetration, active ingredients, and the action of skin peels. Students will be expected to work with a specialised practitioner as a mentor to support this arrangement.
Recommended Reading Australian Attorney-General's Department. 1989. Therapeutic Goods Act. Canberra, ACT: AGPS. Victorian Attorney-General's Department. 1978. Physiotherapist's Act. Government Printer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory.
Assessment Presentation of case study, 60%; final exam, 40%. Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the assessment in order to gain a pass in the subject.

HHD4128 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS 4

HHD4185 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 5
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisites HBOS Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Explain the gross and developmental anatomy of the nervous system (module 1);
2. Explain the functioning of the nervous system at gross and neural levels (module 1);
3. Apply knowledge in clinical neurology to clinical cases commonly seen in osteopathic practice (module 1);
4. Identify normal and pathological anatomy on diagnostic images (module 2);
5. Competently read radiographs, MRI, CT, ultrasound, bone scans, and other diagnostic images for the diagnosis of congenital anomalies and normal variants, traumatic injuries,scoliosis and infections (module 2);
6. Recognise particular disease states from the identification of abnormalities on scans (module 2).
Content This unit comprises two modules: Module 1: Clinical Neurology; and Module 2: Diagnostic Imaging. The aims of this unit are to develop in students an integrated understanding of the nervous system, neuroanatomy and neurophysiology, neural function and the ability to apply this knowledge to clinical cases; and to instruct students in the reading of radiographs, MRI, CT, ultrasound, bone scans, and other diagnostic images for the diagnosis of congenital anomalies and normal variants, traumatic injuries, scoliosis and infections.
Required Reading Chew, F. (1997). Skeletal radiology: The bare bones (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Eisenberg, R. L., & Johnson, N. M. (2003). Comprehensive radiographic pathology (3rd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Hughes, J., & Hughes, M. (1997). Imaging: Picture tests. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Mace, J. D., & Kowalczyk, N. (1994). Radiographic pathology for technologists (2nd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Redhead, D. N. (1995). Imaging: Colour guide. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Yochum, T. R., & Rowe, L. R. (2005). Yochum and Rowe’s essentials of skeletal radiology (3rd ed., Vols. 1-2). Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Bear, M. F., Connors, B. W., & Paradiso, M. A. (2001). Neuroscience: Exploring the brain (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Bryan, G. J. (1997). Skeletal anatomy (3rd ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Fix, J. D. (1995). Neuroanatomy (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Gunn, C. (1997). Bones and joints: A guide for students. London: Churchill Livingstone. Haines, D. E. (2002). Fundamental neuroscience (2nd ed.). W. B. Saunders Co. Kandel, E. R., Schwartz, J. H., & Jessell, T. M. (2000). Principles of neural science (4th ed.). USA: McGraw-Hill. Longmore, J., Wilkinson, I., & Rajagopalan, S. (2004). Oxford handbook of clinical medicine (6th ed.). Oxford: OUP. Newman Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co. Nolte, J. (2002). The human brain: An introduction to its functional anatomy (5th ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Nolte, J., & Angevine, Jr. J. B. (2000). The human brain in photographs and diagrams (2nd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Wicke, L. (1997). Atlas of radiologic anatomy (6th ed.). Munich, Germany: Lea & Febiger.
Class Contact Seventy-two (72) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment One 1-hour laboratory examination (Clinical Neurology, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 15-minute practical slide examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 1-hour written examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 2-hour final written examination (Clinical Neurology, 25%, hurdle requirement).

HHD4228 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS 5

HHD4286 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 6
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisites HHD4185 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 5; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Competently use the vocabulary of the neurological examination (module 1);
2. Explain the fundamentals of the clinical history as it pertains to neurological disease (module 1);
3. Explain the key diagnostic procedures, tests and investigations employed in neurology (module 1);
4. Competently use standard diagnostic equipment (e.g., stethoscope, otoscope,ophthalmoscope, reflex hammer, tuning fork) to conduct a rapid screening test of the nervous system (module 1);
5. Competently use standard diagnostic equipment to carry out the detailed examination of the key components of the nervous system (sensory, motor, cranial nerves, cerebral cortex, basal ganglia, cerebellum, upper and lower motor neurons, skeletal muscles, nerve damage in the upper and lower limb) (module 1);
6. Use a basic diagnostic algorithm to arrive at a differential diagnosis (module 1);
7. Predict basic abnormal signs and symptoms that may be encountered when named structures are affected by pathology (module 1);
8. Recognise the main classes of headache and their specific clinical manifestations (module 1);
9. Distinguish normal from pathological anatomy on diagnostic images (module 2);
10. Incorporate knowledge in anatomy and physiology when reading scans (module 2);
11. Competently read radiographs, MRI, CT, ultrasound, bone scans, and other diagnostic images for the diagnosis of arthritides, primary and secondary tumours, tumour-like disorders, metabolic, vascular, and endocrine diseases (module 2);
12. Discuss the development, testing, approval and subsidy processes for drugs used and sold in Australia (module 3);
13. Explain the basic methods of drug action and of pharmacological concepts such as pharmacokinetics and dynamics (module 3);
14. Explain the main classes, and practical uses, of drugs relevant to osteopathic practice (module 3).
ContentThis unit comprises three modules: Module 1: Neurological Assessment; Module 2: Diagnostic Imaging 2; and Module 3: Pharmacology 1. Module 1: Neurological Assessment is designed to improve students’ knowledge of and skills in the clinical examination of the nervous system, including use of the typical equipment employed in the neurological examination. Students will also be stimulated to develop an integrated understanding of the key pathological clinical manifestations of neurological diseases; Module 2: Diagnostic Imaging 2 provides opportunities for students for improve skills in reading radiographs, MRI, CT, ultrasound, bone scans, and other diagnostic images for the diagnosis of arthritides, primary and secondary tumours, tumour-like disorders, metabolic, vascular, and endocrine diseases; Module 3: Pharmacology 1 is designed to develop in students’ an awareness of the development, testing, approval and subsidy processes for drugs used and sold in Australia, and to be acquainted with the actions, interactions, adverse reactions, and implications for drugs relevant to osteopathic practice.
Required Reading Bickley, L. S. (2004). Bates' guide to physical examination and history taking (8th. ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Chew, F. (1997). Skeletal radiology: The bare bones (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Eisenberg, R. L., & Johnson, N. M. (2003). Comprehensive radiographic pathology (3rd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Hughes, J., & Hughes, M. (1997). Imaging: Picture tests. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Longmore, J., Wilkinson, I., & Rajagopalan, S. (2004). Oxford handbook of clinical medicine (6th ed.). Oxford: OUP. Mace, J. D., & Kowalczyk, N. (1994). Radiographic pathology for technologists (2nd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Newman Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co. Redhead, D. N. (1995). Imaging: Colour guide. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Upfal, J. (2006). The Australian drug guide (7th ed. rev.). Melbourne, Australia: Black Inc. Yochum, T. R., & Rowe, L. R. (2005). Yochum and Rowe’s essentials of skeletal radiology (3rd ed., Vols. 1-2). Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Bouchier, I. A. D., Ellis. H,, & Fleming, P. R. (Eds.). (1996). French's index of differential diagnosis (13th ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press. Cailliet, R. (1991). Neck and arm pain (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: FA Davis. Cailliet, R. (1991). Shoulder pain (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: FA Davis.
Class Contact Seventy-two (72) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance
Assessment One 15-minute final oral examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 15-minute final practical examination (Neurological Assessment, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 1-hour written examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 25%, hurdle requirement), one 1.5-hour written (MCQ format) examination (Pharmacology, 25%, hurdle requirement).

HHD4739 DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of the subject is to teach students the theory underlying radiological examination modalities, and to teach the recognition of pathological entities in a variety of imaging types. At the end of this subject the students should have an understanding of the theory and physics of various radiological examinations, and be able to recognise the radiological signs of common pathologies. content will include: Physics of imaging. Imaging modalities, methods, safety procedures and regulations. Requesting radiographs. Normal variants. Congenital anomalies. Scoliosis. Trauma - fractures, dislocations etc. Infections. Arthritides. Tumour processes. Vascular abnormalities. Metabolic and endocrine abnormalities incl. Osteoporosis and Paget's disease. Soft tissue pathologies. Respiratory disease. Abdominal viscera and visceral disease.
Recommended Reading Rather than use a single text, students should access a wide variety of texts, atlases and CD-ROMs from the following list and library resources. Yochum, T.R. and Rowe, L.J. 1996, Essentials of Skeletal Radiology (2nd ed.) Vols 1 and 2, Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore. Chew F. 1997, Skeletal Radiology: The Bare Bones, (2nd ed.) Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore. Hughes J, Hughes, M, 1997, Imaging: Picture tests. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh. Mace JD, Kowalczyk N 1994, Radiographic pathology for technologists (2nd ed.), Mosby, St. Louis. Redhead, DN, 1995, Imaging: Colour guide, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Subject Hours One one-hour lecture per week for the first semester. Two hours per week for the second semester comprising one one-hour lecture and one one-hour workshop/tutorial or equivalent.
Assessment Written response slide exam at end of semester one, 100%; viva voce examination at end of semester two, 100%.

HHD4779 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 3
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHD3579 Clinical Diagnosis and Management 2; or equivalent.
Content The aim of the subject is to teach the students to recognise the clinical presentations of conditions affecting the named systems, and to understand the clinical tests and orthodox management protocols for them. By the end of the year the students should be able to recognise the clinical signs and symptoms of typical conditions affecting the named systems, carry out appropriate examinations, be able to interpret clinical tests, and understand the medical management of these conditions. Content will include: The cardiovascular, respiratory and gastrointestinal systems will be covered during the first semester and the endocrine, genito-urinary, renal and haematological systems in the second semester. Case studies will be employed to facilitate student learning. The focus will be on the clinical presentation of conditions of the above-mentioned body systems with emphasis on the following areas: recognition of life-threatening conditions: the detailed clinical examination of the above-mentioned body systems: laboratory tests and special investigations which are commonly employed in the diagnosis of conditions affecting the above-mentioned body systems: important differential diagnostic pathways: a brief review of the orthodox medical management of conditions affecting the above systems.
Required Reading The set of prepared Lecture notes is the only prescribed text for this course
Recommended Reading Hart D (ed) (1986) French's Index of Differential Diagnosis Wright Pub Bristol. Rubenstein D and Wayne D (1991) Lecture Notes on Clinical Medicine Blackwell Scientific Publications Oxford. Bates B (1991) A Guide To Physical Examination and History Taking (Fifth Edition) J.B. Lippincott Company, Philadelphia. Dorland's Illustrated Medical Dictionary (1988) Saunders and Co Philadelphia. Hoppenfeld S (1976) Physical Examination of the Spine and Extremities Appleton-Century-Crofts New York. Swash and Mason (1989) Hutchinsons Clinical Methods Balliere Tindal London. Seidel H (1995) Mosby's Guide to Physical Examination Mosby St Louis. Walker H K, Dallas Hall W (1980) Clinical Methods Butterworths London. Edwards C.R.W, Bouchier, IAD, Haslett, C and Chilvers ER (1995), Davidson's Principles and Practice of Medicine (17th ed.) Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Subject Hours Four hours per week or equivalent for two semesters comprising lectures, tutorials/workshops and practicals.
Assessment Semester one: Written examination, 30%; practical/viva voce, 20%. Semester two: Written examination, 30%; practical/viva voce, 20%.

HHD5187 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 7
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHD4286 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 6; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Distinguish amongst normal changes and typical and atypical pathological changes on diagnostic images (module 1);
2. Determine when diagnostic images are clinically indicated (module 1);
3. Interpret typical and atypical diagnostic images in a clinical setting (module 1);
4. Integrate typical and atypical diagnostic images with other clinical information to guide clinical decision making (module 1);
5. Describe the public and private health system costs associated with diagnostic images (module 1);
6. Interpret clinical signs and symptoms pertinent to conditions typically seen in paediarics, obstetrics, otolaryngology, psychiatry, and to serious and specific disorders in obstetrics,paediatrics and psychiatry (module 2);
7. Interpret clinical tests and special investigations commonly used in the diagnosis of conditions typically seen in obstetrics, paediatrics and psychiatry (module 2);
8. Explain the conventional medical management of paediatric, obstetric, ENT and psychiatric conditions typically presenting in osteopathic practice (module 2);
9. Explain serious and common disorders in obstetrics, paediatrics and psychiatry may impact on osteopathic practice (module 2);
10. Discuss potential problems in osteopathy for the professional and the profession, and explore different ways of effectively responding to those problems (module 2);
11. Evaluate the role of nutrients in health and disease (module 3);
12. Recognize and respond appropriately to patients with nutritional deficiencies and eating disorders (module 3);
13. Explain the impact of nutritional status in specific clinical conditions relevant to the practising osteopath (module 3);
14. Relate the methods used for assessing food safety and the principles of food hygiene (module 3);
15. Discuss the actions, interactions and adverse effects of the major drugs commonly seen in osteopathic practice (module 4);
16. Explain referrals procedures and discuss ethical issues in cases where medications may becausing health problems (module 4);
17. Discuss the actions, interactions and adverse effects of the drugs for the management of cardiovascular, gastrointestinal, respiratory, skin and psychiatric disorders (module 4).
Content Module 1: Diagnostic Imaging 3 reviews pathologies by region using all imaging modalities; skull, cervical spine, thoracic spine, chest, lumbar spine; abdomen including foetal screening; pelvis and hip; upper and lower limb.
Module 1: Diagnostic Imaging 3 reviews pathologies by region using all imaging modalities; skull, cervical spine, thoracic spine, chest, lumbar spine; abdomen including foetal screening; pelvis and hip; upper and lower limb.
Module 2: Diagnosis and Management – PBL 1 concentrates on relevant issues and clinical presentations of conditions typically seen in paediatrics, obstetrics, otolaryngology, psychiatry; clinical tests and conventional medical management of those conditions; more serious disorders in obstetrics, paediatrics and psychiatry; specific areas that impact on osteopathic diagnosis and management.
Module 3: Nutrition and Diet 1 considers carbohydrates, fats, proteins, vitamins, minerals; the healthy diet; diet and disease; naturopathic concepts; the role of various nutrients and nutritional status in both health and disease; the concept of food as medicine; nutritional deficiencies and eating disorders; current recommendations for nutritional management of some common disease states; methods used for assessing food safety; principles of food hygiene. The role of macronutrients and micronutrients in the body is considered and an optimal diet for Australians is described. The role of food in lifestyle diseases, and the nutritional management of these diseases, what constitutes a balanced diet and important nutritional issues for Australians will be discussed.
Module 4: Pharmacology 2 includes drugs used in the treatment of skin conditions and respiratory conditions. Hypnotics, anxiolytics, antidepressants and other drugs used in psychiatric disorders. Drugs used for treating hypertension and angina: adrenoreceptor blockers, anticoagulants and lipid-lowering drugs. Other drugs with vascular effects: 5-HT agonists and sympatheticomimetics. Treatment of central nervous disorders like epilepsy and Parkinsonism. Treatment of diabetes mellitus. Thyroid and other hormones used therapeutically. Drugs used in the treatment of neoplasms. Recreational drugs and effects of substance abuse.
Required Reading Brown, J. E. (1990). The science of human nutrition. USA: Harcourt Brace
Chew, F. (1997). Skeletal radiology: The bare bones (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins.
Giles, L. F. G. (2003). 50 challenging spinal pain syndrome cases. Butterworth-Heinemann.
Springhouse Corporation. (2004). Clinical pharmacology made incredibly easy. New York: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Upfal, J. (2006). The Australian drug guide (7th ed. rev.). Melbourne, Australia: Black Inc.
Yochum, T. R., & Rowe, L. R. (2005). Yochum and Rowe’s essentials of skeletal radiography (3rd ed., Vols. 1-2). Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins.
Students should have access to a copy of the most recent MIMS or the Australian medicines handbook available from Australian Medicines Handbook Web site, http://www.amh.org.au
Recommended Reading Garrow, J. S., & James, W. P. T. (Eds.). (1996). Human nutrition and dietetics (9th ed.). New York: Churchill Livingstone.
Longmore, J., Wilkinson, I., & Rajagopalan, S. (2004). Oxford handbook of clinical medicine (6th ed.). Oxford: OUP.
Mahan, L. K., & Escott-Stump, S. (Eds.). (2003). Krause’s food, nutrition, and diet therapy (10th ed.). Philadelphia: WB Saunders.
Malhqvist, M. L. (Ed.). (2002). Food and nutrition (2nd ed.). Sydney, Australia: Allen and Unwin. Electronic media
For information on updates on PBS listings, visit the Department of Health Web site, http://www.health.gov.au/pbs
For information on most drugs as provided by MIMS, visit the CMPMedica, Australia Web site, http://www.mydr.com.au
For information on consumer medicine information and product information, visit the Royal Australasian College of General Practitioners (RACGP), Web site, http://www.racgp.org.au/library/medicines
For information on drug recalls and safety, visit the Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) Web site, http://www.tga.gov.au
Class Contact One hundred and twenty (120) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and self-directed learning.
Assessment One 15-minute final oral examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 5%, hurdle requirement); one 1-hour final written examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 5%; hurdle requirement); four (4) group-written cases (Diagnosis and Management, 25%, hurdle requirement); two (2) written assignments (2000 words each) (Nutrition and Diet, 10% each, total 20%); one 3-hour final written open-book examination (Diagnosis and Management, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 2-hour final written examination (Pharmacology, 20%).

HHD5288 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 8
Campus
Prerequisites
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Elicit and interpret clinical signs and symptoms pertinent to conditions typically seen in gerontology, dermatology; and to more serious and specific disorders in gerontology, and musculoskeletal medicine (module 1);
2. Interpret clinical tests and special investigations commonly used in the diagnosis of conditions typically seen in gerontology, dermatology and musculoskeletal medicine (module 1);
3. Generate a primary diagnosis and a list of differential diagnoses consistent with typical presentations common in gerontology, dermatology and musculoskeletal medicine (module 1);
4. Explain the medical management of various conditions typically presenting in osteopathic practice (module 1);
5. Discuss how the serious and common disorders and the specialized areas of medical practice (gerontology, dermatology and musculoskeletal medicine) may impact on osteopathic practice (module 1);
6. Apply knowledge, appropriate communications skills and critical reasoning skills consistent with professional osteopathic standards expected during patient consultations (module 1)
7. Discuss potential professional problems and explore different ways of effectively responding to them (module 1);
8. Function as practitioners within a multi-disciplinary health care team (module 1);
9. Function as practitioners who can work independently within the scope of osteopathic practice (module 1);
10. Evaluate the role of nutrients in health and disease (module 2);
11. Explain the impact of nutritional status in specific clinical conditions relevant to the practising osteopath (module 2);
12. State current recommendations for the nutritional management of some common and serious disease states (module 2);
13. Discuss nutritional issues relevant to children, pregnant women and elderly adults (module 2).

Content This unit comprises two modules: Module 1: Diagnosis and Management – Problem Based Learning 2; and Module 2: Nutrition and Diet. Students will be expected to take responsibility for their own learning through peer and self-assessment, by:
1. Considering serious and common disorders, from specific areas of medical specialties (gerontology, dermatology, musculoskeletal medicine) that may impact on osteopathic diagnosis and management;
2. Extending themselves as individuals by transferring key concepts from specific problems to other situations and by discussing, with constructive feedback to others, potential professional problems and exploring different ways of effectively responding to those problems in different organizational structures and processes;
3. Building on earlier material when considering treatment and management issues, by incorporating the major drug categories, actions, indications, contra-indications, interactions, and adverse effects along with the nutrition and diet of the patient;
4. Examining the implications of patient dietary habits in the development and management of specific common and serious diseases;
5. Examining issues from the perspective of the individual, the society and the profession and to explore the impact of those issues onto themselves as clinicians.

Required Reading Brown, J. E. (1990). The science of human nutrition. USA: Harcourt Brace.
Chew, F. (1997). Skeletal radiology: The bare bones (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins.
Giles, L. F. G. (2003). 50 challenging spinal pain syndrome cases. Butterworth-Heinemann.
Yochum, T. R., & Rowe, L. R. (2005). Yochum and Rowe’s essentials of skeletal radiography (3rd ed., Vols. 1-2). Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Garrow, J. S., & James, W. P. T. (Eds.). (1996). Human nutrition and dietetics (9th ed.). New York: Churchill Livingstone.
Haslett, C., Chilvers, E. R., Boon, N. A., Colledge, N. & Hunter, J. A. (2003). Davidson’s principles and practice of medicine (19th ed.). Churchill Livingstone.
Longmore, J., Wilkinson, I., & Rajagopalan, S. (2004). Oxford handbook of clinical medicine (6th ed.). Oxford: OUP.
Newman Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co.
Mahan, L. K., & Escott-Stump, S. (Eds.). (2003). Krause’s food, nutrition, and diet therapy (10th ed.). Philadelphia: WB Saunders.
Malhqvist, M. L. (Ed.). (2002). Food and nutrition (2nd ed.). Sydney, Australia: Allen and Unwin.
Rubenstein, D., Wayne, D., & Bradley. J. (2002). Lecture notes on clinical medicine (6th ed.). London: Blackwell Science.
Saxelby, C. (2002). Nutrition for life (4th ed.). South Yarra, Australia: Hardie Grant Books.
Seidel, H. (1995). Mosby’s guide to physical examination. St Louis, MO: C.V. Mosby.
Truswell, A. (2003). ABC of nutrition (4th ed.). London: BMJ Publishing Group.
Class Contact One hundred and eight (108) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and self-directed learning.
Assessment One written assignment (1500 words) (Nutrition and Diet, 20%); one written assignment (2000 words) (Nutrition and Diet, 30%); four (4) group-written cases (Diagnosis and Management, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 3-hour final written open-book examination (Diagnosis and Management, 25%, hurdle requirement).

HHD5730 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS 6

HHD5731 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS 7

HHD5739 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 4
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHD4779 Clinical Diagnosis and Management 3; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to teach the students to recognise the clinical presentations of conditions affecting the named systems, and to understand the clinical tests and orthodox management protocols for them. By the end of the year the students should be able to recognise the clinical signs and symptoms of typical conditions affecting the named systems, carry out appropriate examinations, be able to interpret clinical tests, and understand the medical management of these conditions. The content will include relevant issues in Paediatrics, Obstetrics, Otolaryngology and Psychiatry, Geriatrics and Dermatology, and common clinical presentations. One hour each week will be spent discussing issues that will arise when working as an Osteopath.
Required Reading There are no specific required texts. Determining the appropriate resources will depend on individual learning needs. Important resources will be referred to during the relevant sessions. Students can refer to any appropriate text or learning resources in order to answer their group-determined learning needs.
Subject Hours Five hours per week for two semesters of small group discussion forums.
Assessment Written examination, 50%; assignment (2000 words) 50%.

HHG5115 PHILOSOPHICAL CONCEPTS OF HEALING
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Approaches to healing throughout the world are embedded in notions of reality, truth, and values about health and illness. The subject explores the philosophies that underpin the major traditions of health and healing. Students are provided with the opportunity to explore and critically appraise the various philosophies. Areas of inquiry will include the general principles of: Oriental Medicine: Chinese and Japanese healing; Ayurveda and Yoga: Indian and Pranic healing; Naturopathy: European natural therapy; Australian Aboriginal healing; Western healing; Shamanistic healing practices. The opportunity to explore the philosophies underlying health and healing practices will provide a broad foundation for the study of the sensory and cognitive healing approaches in the course.
Required Reading Capra, F. (1983). The turning point: Science, society and the rising culture. London: Fontana.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Personal reflective journal; class participation/group work (40%); assignment (2000 words) (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHG5125 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS OF HEALING
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHG5115 Philosophical Concepts of Healing or equivalent
Content This subject provides a theoretical foundation for the study of a range of approaches to health and healing examined during the course. Students will critically appraise the increasing body of literature and research related to the environmental, social, psychological and spiritual dimensions of health and illness. The subject provides a framework that unifies the diverse approaches to healing. The principles informing the understanding of innate healing tendencies and the interconnection of mind and body are studied.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Ader, R. (ed.) 1981, Psychoneuro-immunology, Plenum, New York. Aldridge, D. 1991, Spirituality, healing and medicine British Journal of General Practice 41(351): 425-7. Baum, M. 1989, Rationalism versus irrationalism in the care of the sick: science versus the absurd Medical Journal of Australia 15 December 4(18): 607-8. Capra, F. 1988, Uncommon Wisdom, Collins, London. Foss, L. 1989, The challenge of biomedicine: a foundations perspective Journal of Medical Philosophy 14(2): 165-91. Gawler, I. 1989, Peace of Mind, Hill of content , Melbourne. Hassed, C. and Sommer, S. 1994, The practical aspects of stress management and meditation Australian and New Zealand Association for Medical Education Conference Newcastle July 6-9. Heath, J. 1986, Alternative medicine resources Library Association of Australia Conference and Proceedings pp. 783-98. Husband, A. 1992, of Healing, Penguin, Ringwood. Kaptschuk, T. and Crouder Psychoimmunology: frontier or fantasy? Today's Life Science 4(1): 12-17. Joske, R. and Segal, W. 1987, Ways, M. 1986, The Healing Arts, British Broadcasting Commission, London. Kleinman, A. 1979, Patients as Healers in the Context of Culture, University of California Press, Los Angeles. Krieger, D. 1990, Therapeutic touch: two decades of research, teaching and practice Imprint 37(3): 83, 86-8. Lewith, G. 1985, Alternative Therapies: A Guide to Complementary Medicine for Health Professionals, Heinemann, London. McClellan, R., The Healing Forces of Music: History, Theory and Practice, Amity House, New York. McGinnis, L.S. 1991, Alternative therapies: an overview Cancer 67(6): 1788-92. Owens, K. and Ehrenreich, D. 1991, Literature review of non-pharmacologic methods for the treatment of chronic pain Holistic Nurse Practitioner 6(10): 24-31. Patel, M. 1987, Problems in the evaluation of alternative medicine Social Science and Medicine 25(6): 669-78. Salmon, J. and Warren, J. 1984, Alternative Medicine: Popular and Policy Perspectives, Tavistock, London. Sommer, S. 1993, Stress illness and the mind body connection: a discussion paper (unpublished), Department of Community Medicine, Monash University Melbourne. Sudsuang, R., Chentanez, V. and Velluvan, K. 1991, Effect of Buddhist meditation on serum cortisol, total protein levels, blood pressure, pulse rate, lung volume and reaction time Physiological Behaviour 50: 293-325. Sutherland, J.E. 1991, The link between stress and illness: do our coping methods influence our health? Postgraduate Medicine 89(1): 159-64.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Two 2500 word assignments; 50% each.

HHG5135 HEALING 1: COLOUR, SOUND AND MOVEMENT
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will facilitate the exploration of the concept of health and healing through exposure to the creative processes involved in visual, aural and kinaesthetic techniques. Health and healing are seen in their broadest dimensions as the interconnectedness of the entire living system with the environment. The power of music, art and movement to influence a person and the interaction between environment is explored. The therapeutic effects of self expression to develop individual capacities to their full potential are examined through the use of colour, sound and movement. The focus of the subject is on the maintenance of wellness, rather than a focus on pathology and illness.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars, and self-managed and experiential learning in the field.
Assessment Fieldwork presentation and journal, (40%); major assignment, (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHG5145 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS OF HEALING 2
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject further develops students' knowledge of approaches to health and healing. Individual, group and family counselling theories are examined from both an Oriental and Western perspective. Within the counselling environment cultural differences will be explored and appropriate techniques applied.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1991) Theory and practice of counselling and psychotherapy. (4th ed.). Pacific Grove, California: Brooks/Cole.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials seminars and self-managed learning
Assessment Personal reflective journal, (30%); theory paper (40%); evidence of participation (skills demonstration, evidence of reading, class discussion) (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (theory paper) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHG5245 HEALING 2: TACTILE THERAPIES
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHG5135 Healing 1: Colour, Sound and Movement; or equivalent.
Content This subject provides the opportunity to further develop the knowledge and skills gained in Healing 1. The central focus of this subject is the conceptual and skill development of touch as a healing therapy. The therapeutic use of touch is a powerful healing tool utilised in may cultures to enhance growth and development in the young, promote and maintain well being, and to heal and comfort the sick. The conceptual, metaphysical and functional basis of Therapeutic Touch, Swedish massage and Shiatsu is studied from both an historical and contemporary perspective. The key principles of the therapeutic use of self, music, colour, scent and movement will be integrated into this unit.
Required Reading Krieger, D. (1993) Accepting your power to heal: The personal practice of therapeutic touch. Santa Fe: Bear and Co. Montagu, A. (1986). Touching. NY: Harper and Row.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials seminars, self-managed learning and fieldwork.
Assessment Practical examination (40%); field experience and personal reflective journal (20%); written assignment (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (practical examination and written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHG5255 HEALING 3: APPROACHES TO HEALING SKILLS
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design and Methods; or equivalent.
Content This subject builds on the key theoretical frameworks introduced in Theoretical Foundations of Healing Practice. Students are exposed to a broad range of techniques designed to teach individuals skills in maintaining well-being and equilibrium. The meaning of health and well being is explored in the context of the link between stress arousal and the disease process. A combination of approaches which influence healing skills are examined, for example the concept of stress as described by Cannon, Lazarus, Selye, Spiegal and Solomon. Various relaxation responses will be explored. The skills of autogenic training, progressive relaxation, deep muscle relaxation, visual imagery, biofeedback, self-awareness techniques and body breathing exercises are explored. The application of these skills is discussed in relation to a range of situations.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials seminars, self-managed learning and fieldwork.
Assessment Seminar presentation (20%); essay (40%); experiential workshop or fieldwork (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHG5265 RESEARCH PROJECT
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design and Methods or equivalent.
Content This subject is the culminating unit and provides students with the opportunity to further develop and apply the knowledge and understanding acquired in previous subjects of the course. Students will use the proposal developed in HHR 0001 Introduction to Research Design and Methods and implement a literature-based project, which critically analyses an area of professional interest relevant to complementary medicine and healing therapies. The aims and objectives of this subject will be introduced to the students at the commencement of the course to allow for reflection and preparation for the continuation of the project.
Recommended Reading Byrne, C. (1992). Complementary therapy: Research methods in complementary medicine. Nursing Standard 6, 54-6.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Submission of completed project (5000 words) (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (completed project) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH2301 UNIVERSITY SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE STUDENTS
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Library orientation and tour; the study of and in an holistic paradigm; introduction to computer skills for Natural Medicine studies; introduction to Internet skills for Natural Medicine studies; Natural Medicine study skills; research skills; introduction to active learning, self-managed learning, problem solving and problem based learning; and the development of mentor relationships for learning in practice based subjects.
Required Reading Anderson, J., & Poole, M. (1995). Thesis and assignment writing (2nd ed.). Brisbane: John Wiley & Sons. Strunk, W. (1979). Elements of style. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Recommended Reading Williams, J. M. (1997). Style - Ten lessons in clarity and grace (5th ed.). New York: Addison-Wesley Educational Publishers Inc.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Student portfolio (hurdle requirement); two written assignments (50% each). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained in each of the two written assignments. Failed assessment items (assignments) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH2302 IRIDOLOGY 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The study of 'Iris diagnosis'. Iridology will be explored covering the observation of the structural, functional and chemical changes in the body, rather than the diagnosis of specific diseases. Iridology will be covered from the perspective of the science and art of reading the 'big picture', in terms of constitutional strengths, the vitality of key body systems, and the degree of encumbrance. The classes will include practical work where students will examine the iris with their own suitable hand held equipment, so that the theoretical understanding is consistently accompanied by practical experience.
Required Reading Jackson, A. (1994). Alternative health iridology. A guide to iris analysis and preventative health care. London: MacDonald Optima. Mamer, D. (1996). Practical iridology and sclerology. Utah, USA: Woodland Publishing. Jensen, B. (1982). Iridology simplified: An introduction to the science of iridology and its relation to nutrition. Escondido, CA: Bernard Jensen Enterprises.
Recommended Reading Deck, J. (1982). Principles of iris diagnosis; Textbook with atlas and indications to treatment. Germany: Ettlingen Publishers. Hall, D. (1980). Iridology; Personality and health analysis through the iris. Melbourne: Keats Health Books. Hall. D. (1984). Iridology. Melbourne: Thomas Nelson. Jensen, B. (1952). The science and practice of Iridology. A system of analysing and curing the body through the use of drugless and nature cure methods. Los Angeles, CA: Bernard Jensen Enterprises. Sharan, F. (1989). Iridology. A complete guide to diagnosing through the iris and to related forms of treatment. Wellingborough, UK: Thorsons. Vriend, J. (1989). Eyes talk. Melbourne: Lothian.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Practical (30%), clinical participation (10%) (hurdle requirement); one examination (60%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (practical) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHH2303 BODYWORK THERAPIES 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the student to basic concepts involved in all aspects of bodywork including the, musculoskeletal system and will include practitioner/client relationship skills involved in performing relaxation massage and remedial massage.
Required Reading Cassar, M. (1999). Handbook of massage therapy. A complete guide for the student and professional massage therapist. Oxford: Utterworth-Heinmann. Fitz, S. (2000). Mosby's fundamentals of therapeutic massage. (2nd ed.). St Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Chia, M. (1982). Awakening healing energy through the Tao. NY: Aurora. Salvo, S. G. (1999). Massage therapy. Principles and practice. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One practical assessment (50%); one written assignment (50%); one personal reflections journal (hurdle requirement). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for the practical assessment and the written assignment. Failed assessment items (practical assessment and written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH2304 AROMATHERAPY
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content A basic introduction to a full range of aromatherapy oils, their uses, contra indications.
Required Reading Battaglia, S. (1997). The complete guide to aromatherapy. Perfect potion. Queensland: Virginia. Price, S. (2000). Aromatherapy workbook. London: Thorsons.
Recommended Reading Arcier, M. (1992). Aromatherapy. London: Hamlyn. Davis, P. (1988). Aromatherapy an A-Z. Essex, UK: Daniels Co. Fischer-Rizzi, S. (1990). Complete aromatherapy handbook. NY: Sterling Publishing Co. International Journal of Aromatherapy, Available at Harcourt Web site, htttp:/www.harcourt-international.com/journal/ijar Tiran, D. (1996). Aromatherapy in midwifery practice. London: Balliere Tindall. Worwood, V. (1991). The fragrant pharmacy. UK: Bantam Books.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (40%); one case study (30%); practical assessment (30%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained in each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (written assignment, case study, and practical Assessment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt or resubmission will be 50%.

HHH3100 BODYWORK THERAPIES 2
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH2303 Bodywork Therapies 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject will expand the students knowledge involved in all aspects of bodywork and will include practitioner/client relationship, knowledge and skills involved in performing various bodywork therapies, including Reflexology, Alexander Technique, Bowen Therapy, Feldenkrais, Shiatsu, Relaxation Massage and Remedial Massage.
Required Reading Byers, D. (2001). Better health with foot reflexology. USA: Inham Publications. Chaitow, L. (1997). Palpation skills: assessment and function. (4th. ed.). London: Butterworth Heineman. Fitz, S. (2000). Mosby's fundamentals of therapeutic massage. (2nd ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Ingham, E. (1985). Stories the feet have told. USA: Ingham Publications. Petty, N., & Moore, A. P. (2001). Neuromuscular examination and Assessment: A handbook for therapits. London: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Cassar, M. (1999). Handbook of massage therapy. A complete guide for the student and professional massage therapist. Oxford: Utterworth-Heinmann. Chia, M. (1982). Awakening healing energy through the Toa. NY: Aurora. Kaptchuk, T. (1983). Chinese medicine; The web that has no weave. (2nd ed.). London: Rider. Prentice, W. W., & Voight, M. (2001). Techniques in musculoskeletal rehabilitation. NY: McGraw-Hill. Salvo, S. G. (1999). Massage therapy. Principles and practice. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One personal reflections journal (hurdle requirement); one practical assessment (50%); one written assignment (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained in each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (practical assessment and written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt or resubmission will be 50%.

HHH3101 IRIDOLOGY 2
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH2302 Iridology I, or equivalent.
Content The study of 'Iris diagnosis'. The classes will include practical work with a view to fine-tuning treatment strategies for the patients, where students will examine the iris with suitable hand held equipment, so that the theoretical understanding is consistently accompanied by practical experience. The individual iris is examined as an aid to practical assessment of the individual patient condition, which is most important to assist the patient in, developing his or her own self-care strategies for achieving health. Emotional and mental health patterns will be explored using the Rayid method of iris diagnosis. Practical work in the classroom as well as outside the classroom is encouraged. The practical nature of iris analysis is consistently explored.
Required Reading Deck, J. (1983). Differentiation of iris markings. (Differential Diagnosis) Textbook II, Germany: Ettlingen Publishers. Jackson, A. (1994). Alternative health iridology; A guide to iris analysis and preventative health care. London: MacDonald Optima. Jensen, B. (1982). The science & practice in the healing arts. (Vol. II). Escondido, CA: Bernard Jensen Enterprises. Johnson, D. R., & Ness, E. J. (1995). What the eye reveals. Boulder, CO: Rayid Publication. Jensen, B. (1982). Iridology simplified: An introduction to the science of iridology and its relation to nutrition. Escondido, CA: Bernard Jensen Enterprises. Mamer, D. (1996). Practical iridology and sclerology. Utah: Woodland Publishing.
Recommended Reading Deck, J. (1982). Principles of iris diagnosis. Textbook with atlas and indications to treatment. Germany: Ettlingen Publishers. Hall, D. (1980). Iridology; personality and health analysis through the iris. Melbourne: Keats Health Books. Hall, D. (1984). Iridology. Melbourne: Thomas Nelson. Jensen, B. (1952). The science and practice of iridology: A system of analysing and curing the body through the use of drugless and nature cure methods. Los Angeles, CA: Bernard Jensen Enterprises. Lindlahr, H. (1985). Natural therapeutics: Vol. IV: Iridiagnosis and other diagnostic methods. Walden, UK: C.W. Daniel Company. Sharan, F. (1989). Iridology; A complete guide to diagnosing through the iris and to related forms of treatment. Wellborough, UK: Thorsons.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Practical assessment (35%); written assignment (35%); logbook of at least three case studies (30%) (hurdle requirement). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (practical assessment and written assignment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH3102 HOMOEOPATHY 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The Homoeopathic Materia Medica is introduced through an exploration of the components of a homoeopathic 'drug picture', including 'subjective symptom' 'modality' 'sphere of action', 'QPRS symptom', 'causation', 'generality', 'characteristic particular' and 'keynote'. This is illustrated through a detailed study of the simplexes most frequently used in Homoeopathic practice. Following on from this is an introduction to the structure of the Periodic Table; 'cations' and 'anions', synthetic prescribing, and a differentiation of remedy groups on the table in terms of common psychological characteristics and sequential patterning. An in-depth study of some of the most significant of these groups such as The Calcareas, The Phosphoricums, The Magnesiums, and the Sulphuricums, with reference to a wide variety of sources.
Required Reading Boericke, W. (1993). Pocket manual of Materia Medica and repertory. New Delhi: B. Jain. Kent, J. T. (1995). Lectures on Materia Medica. New Delhi: B. Jain. Scholten, J. (1993). Homoeopathy and minerals. Utrecht: Stichting Alonnissos. Schotlen, J. (1996). Homoeopathy and the elements. Utrecht: Stichting Alonnissos.
Recommended Reading Allen, T. F. (1990). The encyclopaedia of pure Materia Medica. Vol. 1-12. New Delhi: B. Jain. Allen, H. C. (1992). Allen's key notes. New Delhi: B. Jain. Blackie, M. G. (1990). Classical homoeopathy. Beaconsfield, UK: Beaconsfield Publishers Ltd. Boger, C. M. (1993). A synoptic key to Materia Medica. New Delhi: B. Jain. Gibson, D. M. (1990). Studies of homoeopathic remedies. Beaconsfield, UK: Beaconsfield Press. Hardy-Clarke, G. (1988). The ABC manual of Materia Medica and therapeutics. New Delhi: B. Jain. Hering, C. (1995). The guiding symptoms of our Materia Medica. Vol 1-10. Indian Books and Periodicals Syndicate. Hering, C. (1999). Condensed Materia Medica. New Delhi: B. Jain. Jouanny, J. (1984). The essentials of homoeopathic Materia Medica. Bourdeaux: Laboratoire Boiron. Morrison, R. (1993). Desktop guide to keynotes and confirming symptoms. Nevada City, CA: Hahnemann Clinic Publishers. Nash, E. B. (1984). Leaders in homoeopathic therapeutics. New Delhi: B. Jain. Phatak, S. R. (1982). Materia Medica of homoeopathic medicines. Bombay: S. R. Phatak. Shepherd, D. (1992). Homoeopathy for the first aider. The C.W. Daniel Co. Ltd. Vermeulen. F. (1997). Concordant Materia Medica. Netherlands: Emryss. BV Publishers. Von Lippe, A. (1989). Key notes and red line symptoms of the Materia Medica. New Delhi: B.Jain. Ward, J. W. (1983). Unabridged dictionary of the sensations as if … New Delhi: B. Jain.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (50%); one examination (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHH3103 PHYTOTHERAPEUTIC MATERIA MEDICA 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce students to phytochemical and pharmacological principles as they relate to Herbal Medicines. In addition this subject will enable students to identify fresh plant materials used in herbal medicine. Teaching will focus on the nature of the bioactive principles and their interaction with human pathological processes where possible. Emphasis will be on the pharmacognosy and pharmacology of herbal medicine as it pertains to clinical practice. The subject will cover the main classes of Phytochemical compounds. Attention will also be given to the toxicity of plants.
Required Reading Mill S., & Bone, K. (2000). Principles and practice of phytotherapy. UK: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading De Smet, P., Keller, K., Hansel, R., & Chandler, R. F. (1993). Adverse effects of herbal drugs Volumes I - II. Germany: Berlin Springer-Verlag. Duke, J. A. (1992). Handbook of biologically active phytochemicals and their activities. CRC Press, Boca Raton. Holmes, P. (1989). Energetics of western herb. Colorado: Artemis Press. Mills, S. (1991). Essential book of herbal medicine. England: Arkana. Weiss, R. (1988.) Herbal medicine. Beaconsfield, UK: Beaconsfield publishers.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Individual presentation (20%) (hurdle requirement); written assignment (40%); theory examination (40%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHH3104 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMEOPATHIC CLINICALS
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content During this semester students will commence their clinical training in the role of a assistant practitioner under the guidance of a clinical supervisor and will be required to fulfil all aspects of case taking and assessment, planning a treatment strategy and providing and dispensing the treatment, including all aspects of Naturopathic and Homoeopathic principles as it applies to the individual patient. Students will be required to complete 50% of their total hours with a naturopath or homoeopath currently in practice in Melbourne.
Required Reading British Herbal medicine Association 1984, British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association Publishing. England. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby's handbook of Herbs & Natural Supplements. USA: Mosby Publications.
Recommended Reading Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-drug interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick, Queensland: MediHerb. Health Department Victoria (1990). Health and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department Victoria. Lininger. S. (Ed.) (1999). A-Z guide to drug-herb-vitamin interactions. USA: Prima Health. Murray, M. (1994). Natural alternatives to over-the-counter and prescription drugs. NY: William Morrow & Co.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of required 36 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHH3200 HOMEOPATHY 2
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH3102 Homoeopathy 1; or equivalent.
Content A detailed study of the Chronic Miasms: Psora, Sycosis, Tubercular, and Syphilitic. Case Taking Analysis: Sensitivity and Susceptibility; Pre-Disposition, Disposition, Diathesis and Disease; Life-Space Chart and Evolutionary Totality. Posology and Remedy Reaction. Homoeopathic Pharmacy. Hahnemann's Organon of Medicine, his life and work. In-depth study of Homoeopathic Philosophy including Hahnemann's Organon of Medicine' and works and lesser writings of Hahnemann, Kent and Boenninghausen. Practical skills in Case-Taking, Repertorization and Analysis techniques.
Required Reading Boericke, W. M. (1993). A compend of the principles of homoeopathy. New Delhi: B. Jain. Choudhury, H. (1999). Indications of miasm. New Delhi: B. Jain. Hahnemann, S. (2000). The Organon of Medicine. (W. Boericke, Trans.) (6th ed.). New Delhi: B. Jain. Kent, J. T. (1900). Lectures on homoeopathic philosophy. North Atlantic Books. Berkeley. California. U.S.A. Speight, P. (1948). A comparison of the chronic miasms. New Delhi: B. Jain.
Recommended Reading Allen, T. F. (1990). Boenninghausen's therapeutic pocket book. New Delhi: B. Jain. Bannerjee, N.K. & Sinha, N. (1992). A treatise on homoeopathic pharmacy. New Delhi: B. Jain. Blackie, M. (1977). The patient, not the cure. Rupa & Co. Bradford, T. L. (1988). The lesser writings of C.M.F. Von Boenninghausen. New Delhi: B. Jain. Dudgeon, R. E. (1990). The lesser writings of Samuel Hahnemann. New Delhi: B. Jain. Hael, R. (1995). Samuel Hahnemann, his life and work. New Delhi: B. Jain. Hobhouse, R. W. (1995). Life of Christian Samuel Hahnemann. New Delhi: B. Jain. Kent, J. T. (1992). New remedies, clinical cases, lesser writings, aphorisms and precepts. New Delhi: B. Jain. Shepherd, D. (1995). The magic of the minimum dose. Essex, UK: C.W. Daniel.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Clinical participation (10%) (hurdle requirement); written assignment (50%); written examination (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHH3201 NUTRICEUTICALS
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the student to basic concepts of nutriceuticals, their actions and interaction and availability of products, when to prescribe to clients and how they should be used in conjunction with a balanced diet.
Required Reading Groff, J. L., & Gropper, S. S. (1999). Advanced nutrition and human metabolism (3rd ed.). Australia: Wadsworth. Hendler, S., & Rorvik, D. (Eds). (2001). PDR for nutritional supplements. Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics Company. Murray, M. (1996). Encyclopaedia of nutritional supplements. USA: Prima Health.
Recommended Reading Australian Journal of Nutrition and Dietetics. Other journals and web sites to be advised by Lecturers.
Subject Hours A minimum of twenty-four (24) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (40%); one theory assessment (40%); one case study (20%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (written assignment and theory Assessment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHH3202 COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content An introduction to the role of the counsellor and relationship between the client and practitioner. The following theories will be covered; Psychoanalytic, Alderian, Existential, Person Centred, Gestalt, Reality, Behavioural, Cognitive, Family Systems, Ego State Therapies, as well as meditation, relaxation therapy; and Ethical and Legal issues of Counselling.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1997). Theory and practice of counselling and psychotherapy. (5th ed). California: Brooks/Cole Pub Co. Corsini, R. J., & Wedding, D. (Eds.). Current psychotherapies. (5th ed.). IL: F.E. Peacock. Publisher Inc.
Recommended Reading Grof, S., & Bennett, H. Z. (1990). The holotropic mind. San Francisco: Harper Collins. Hammer, L. (1990). Dragon rises, red bird flies. NY: Station Hill Press. Wilber, K. (1989). The spectrum of consciousness. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House. Wilber, K. (1975). Psychologia perennis: The spectrum of consciousness. The Journal of Transpersonal Psychology 7, (2).
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Class participation (25%); written theory assignment (50%); reflective journal (25%) (hurdle requirement). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained in class participation activities and the written theory assignment. Failed assessment items (practical assessment and written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH3203 DEVELOPING PHARMACOLOGICAL UNDERSTANDING IN NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTICE
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Interactions and contraindications of drug use; understanding Pharmacology and its interactions upon the systems of the body; the effect of drugs on adults and children by following the general principles of absorption, distribution, metabolism and elimination.
Required Reading Craig, C., & Stitzer, R. (1997). Modern pharmacology with clinical applications. (5th ed.). Boston, USA: Little Brown. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied health professionals (4th ed.). Australia: Pearson Education Australia. Hardman, J. G., Limbird, L. E., Molinoff, P. B., Ruddon, R. W., & Gilman, A. G. (Eds.). (1996). Goodman & Gilman's the pharmacological basis of therapeutics. (9th ed.). NY: McGraw-Hill, Health Professions Division.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Seminar presentation (20%); two written assignments (40% each). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for both written assignments. Failed assessment items (written assignments) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH3204 VIBRATIONAL MEDICINE
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the student to basic concepts of vibrational medicine including, Therapeutic touch, colour, sound, meditation, homoeopathy and flower essences. Energy healing, the role of intuition, spirituality and all other areas related to the metaphysical.
Required Reading Brennan, B. (1987). Hands of light. NY: Bantam Books. Capra, F. (1983). The turning point: Science, society and the rising culture. London: Fontana.
Recommended Reading Ackernecht, E. (1982). A short history of medicine. Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press. Benoist, J., & Cathebras, P. (1993). The body from immateriality to another social science and medicine (UK) 39 (7): 857-65. Brennan, B. (1993). Light emerging. NY: Bantam Books. Capra, F. (1983). The Tao of physics. London: Fontana Paperbacks. Charlesworth, M. (1982). Science, non science and pseudoscience. Geelong; Deakin University Press. Chopra, D. (1989). Quantum healing: Exploring the frontiers of medicine. NY: Bantam Books. Clifford, T. (1989). The diamond healing: Tibetan Buddhist medicine and psychiatry. Northamptonshire: Woolnough. Eagle, R. (1978). Alternative medicine guide to the medical underground. Great Britain: Future Publications. Gerber, R. (1988). Vibrational medicine. Santa Fe, USA: Bear & Co. Griggs, B. (1981). Green pharmacy: A history of herbal medicine. London: Robert Hale. Grossinger, R. (1980). Plant Medicine. Berkley, CA: North Atlantic Books. Holbrook, B. (1981). The Stone Monkey: An Alternative Chinese-Scientific Reality. William Morrow. New York. Kaptchuk. T. J. 1983. Chinese Medicine: The Web that Has No Weaver. NY: Congdon and Week. Manning, C., & Vanrenen. L. (1988). Bioenergetic Medicine East and West. CA: North Atlantic Books. McClenon, J. (1993). The Experiential Foundations of Shamanic Healing. Journal of Medical Philosophy 18 (2): 107-270 Payer, L.1989. Medicine and Culture. Victor Gollancz. London. Wilber. K. 1989. The Spectrum of Consciousness. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House. Wilber, K. (1990). Eye to Eye-The Quest for the New Paradigm. Boston: Shambhala. Zukav, G. (1988). The Dancing Wu Li Master. London: Fontana.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One combined oral and practical examination (50%) (hurdle requirement); one written assignment (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (practical examination and written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH3205 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMOEOPATHIC INTERNSHIP 1
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHH3104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Clinicals; or equivalent.
Content During this semester students will assume the role of the practitioner under the guidance of a clinical supervisor and will be required to fulfil all aspects of case taking and Assessment, planning a treatment strategy and providing and dispensing the treatment, including all aspects of Naturopathic and Homoeopathic principles as it applies to the individual patient. Students will be required to complete 50% of their hours with a naturopathy or homoeopath currently in practice in Melbourne.
Required Reading British Herbal medicine Association 1984, British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association Publishing. England. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby's handbook of herbs & natural supplements. USA: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Health Department Victoria 1990. Health and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department Victoria. Lininger, S. (Ed.). (1999). A-Z Guide to Drug-Herb-Vitamin Interactions, USA: Prima Health. Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-drug interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick, Queensland: MediHerb. Murray, M. (1994). Natural alternatives to over-the-counter and prescription drugs. NY: William Morrow & Co.
Subject Hours A minimum of ninety-six (96) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of required 96 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHH4100 HOMOEOPATHY 3
CampusSt Albans and Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) University Skills for Natural Medicine students, Iridology I, Bodywork Therapies, I Vibrational Medicine I, Nutriceuticals
Content An in-depth study of the Homoeopathic Materia Medica with a focus on the major mineral remedy groups, including groups such as The Siliciums, The Ferrums, The Zincums, The Mercuries, The Nitricums, and The Acids. These groups are studied by drawing on a wide variety of sources and with reference to psychological characteristics common to the groups according to their position on the periodic table. Some of the major plant and animal remedies are introduced.
Required Reading Boericke, W. 1993. Pocket Manual of Materia Medica and Repertory. B. Jain. New Delhi. Kent, J.T. 1995. Lectures on Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi. Scholten, J. 1993. Homoeopathy and Minerals. Stichting Alonnissos. Utrecht. Schotlen, J. 1996. Homoeopathy and the Elements. Stichting Alonnissos. Utrecht. Tyler, M.L. 1952. Homoeopathic Drug Pictures. B. Jain. New Delhi.
Recommended Reading Borland, D. 1988. Homoeopathy in Practice. B. Jain. New Delhi Borland, D. (ND) Children's Types. B. Jain. New Delhi Coulter, C. 1986. Portraits of Homoeopathic Medicines. Vol. 1. North Atlantic Books. Berkeley. California. U.S.A. Coulter, C. 1988. Portraits of Homoeopathic Medicines. Vol 2. North Atlantic Books. Berkeley. California. U.S.A. Dunham, C. 1999. Lectures on Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi. Farrington, E.A. 1991. Clinical Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi Julian, O.A. 1981. Dictionary of Homoeopathic Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi. Teste, A. (ND) The Homoeopathic Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi. Vithoulkas, G. 1988. The Essence of Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi
Subject Hours The equivalence of 60 Hours for one semester
Assessment One written assignment 50%, One examination 50%. A pass must be gained for each component of the assessment.

HHH4101 RESEARCH METHODS
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Evaluation of the health care professionals role in the research process and the significance of research to health care. Discussion of the different trends and issues within health care research. Exploration of legal and ethical considerations in research. Examination of qualitative and quantitative research methods. Consideration of how research ideas/questions can be generated and which research methodology may be appropriate. Data analysis and Computation.
Required Reading Polgar, S., & Thomas, S. (1995). Introduction to research in the health science. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Paton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods. NY: Sage Publications.
Recommended Reading DePoy, E., & Gitlin, L. (1994). Introduction to research: Multiple strategies for health and human services. St Louis: Mosby. Marlin, P., & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical statistics for the health sciences. Melbourne: Thomas Nelson. Minichiello, V. et al (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching People Melbourne Longman Cheshire Wilson, H. S. (1989). Introducing research in nursing. CA: Addison and Wesley Publishing Company. Woods, N. F., & Catanzo, M. (1988). Nursing research: Theory and practice. St Louis: Mosby.
Subject Hours A minimum of twenty-four (24) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Seminar presentation with staff and peer assessment (50%); written assignment (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH4102 ETHICAL AND LEGAL STUDIES
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The Law and Health Care, Introduction to Ethics, Ethics and Law in Health practice, Consent, Negligence, Foregoing and withdrawing treatment, Dying and the law, Mental Health, Confidentiality, Employment: legal and ethical obligations, Resource allocation.
Required Reading Beauchamp, T. L., & Childress, J. F. (1994). Principles of biomedical ethics (4th ed.). New York: Oxford University Press. Eburn, M. (1999). Emergency law. Marrickville, NSW: The Federation Press. Wallace, M. (1995). Health care and the law (2nd ed.). North Ryde, NSW: Law Book Company. Weir, M. (2000). Complementary medicine, ethics and law. Brisbane: Promethus publications.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Online or face-to-face presentation and interactive discussion (40%); written assignment (60%). Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH4103 PHYTOTHERAPEUTIC MATERIA MEDICA 2
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH3103 Phytotherapeutic Materia Medica I; or equivalent.
Content This subject will continue the study of the Western Materia Medica. Medicinal plants will be studied in the context of their actions on the different organs and physiological systems. The subject will examine in detail the phytochemistry, history, ecology, actions, indications, combinations, contra-indications and toxicity of the principal western herbal medicines used in clinical practice
Required Reading British Herbal Medicine Association, 1991. British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, England: British Herbal medicine Association Publishing. Mill, S., & Bone, K. (2000). Principles and practice of phytotherapy. UK: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Ah Ket, G. (1990). Herbal treatment for common ailments. Melbourne Compendium Alstat, E. Eclectic dispensatory of botanical therapeutics Portland Eclectic Institute. De Smet, P., Keller, K., Hansel, R., & Chandler, R. F. (1993). Adverse effects of herbal drugs Volumes I - II. Germany: Berlin Springer-Verlag. Duke. J. A. (1992). Handbook of biologically active phytochemicals and their activities. Boca Raton: CRC Press. Felter, H. W. (1983). The eclectic Materia Medica pharmacology and therapeutics. Portland, USA: Eclectic Medical Publications. Holmes, P. (1989). Energetics of western herb. Colorado: Artemis Press. Hoffman D. (1993). An Elder's Herbal, Healing Arts Press. Rochester. USA Mowray, D. (1990). Next generation herbal medicine New Canaan Connecticut Keats Publishing Mills, S 1994. Comprehensive Guide to Herbal Medicine. Arkana. U.K. Mills S. 1991. The Essential Book of Herbal Medicine. Arkana Penguin. Middlesex England. Murray M 1992 The healing power of herbs. Prima Publishing. Rocklyn. U.S.A. O'Donohue S. 2001. Reference Manual of Therapeutics 2. Self-Published, Melbourne Werbach, M. R. & Murray, M. T. 1994. Botanical influences on illness: a sourcebook of clinical research Tarzana Third Line Press. Upfal, J. (2000). Australian Drug Guide (5th ed.). Melbourne: Bookman Press.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (50%); written examination (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHH4104 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMEOPATHIC CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHH3205 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Clinical Internship I; or equivalent.
Content During this semester students will assume the role of the practitioner under the guidance of a clinical supervisor and will be required to fulfil all aspects of history taking and Assessment, planning a treatment strategy and providing and dispensing the treatment, including all aspects of Naturopathic and Homoeopathic principles as it applies to the individual patient.
Required Reading: British Herbal medicine Association 1984, British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association Publishing. England. Murray, M. 1994. Natural Alternatives to Over-the-Counter and Prescription Drugs. William Morrow & Co. New York.
Recommended Reading: Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-drug interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick, Queensland: MediHerb. Health Department Victoria 1990. Health and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department Victoria. Lininger, S. (Ed.). (1999). A-Z Guide to drug-herb-vitamin interactions, USA: Prima Health. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby's handbook of herbs & natural supplements. USA: Mosby.
Subject Hours A minimum of ninety-six (96) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of required 96 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.

HHH4201 ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS AND SYMPTOMOLOGY FOR NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisites HHH3104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Clinicals; HHH3205 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Internship 1; HHH4104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Clinical Internship 2; or equivalents.
Corequisites HHH4204 Professional Issues; or equivalent.
Content Further development of the biomedical approaches, including the recognition of potential risks of illness and diseases, signs and symptoms are discussed. There will be ongoing discussion of patient self-care and aspects of the practitioner/client relationship in this subject.
Required Rreading Davis. A., & Bolin, T. (1977). Symptom analysis and physical diagnosis in medicine. Australia: Pergamon Press.
Recommended Reading Mills, S., & Bone, K. (2000). Principles and practice of phytotherapy. London: Churchill Livingstone. Werbach, M. R., & Murray, M. T. (1994). Botanical influences on illness: A sourcebook of clinical research Tarzana: Third Line Press. Upfal, J. (2000). Australian Drug Guide (5th ed.). Melbourne: Bookman Press.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Seminar presentation with peer review (20%); written assignment (30%); clinical review (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (written assignment and clinical review) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH4202 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Content Community Health: legal aid, relationship counselling, child guidance, rehabilitation services, fertility clinics, practice management: employer responsibilities, record keeping, taxation, workers compensation, legal and civil requirements; Department of Health regulations: local council regulations, licensing of premises, public risk, the practitioners responsibilities; the bioethical requirements of the profession as they relate to research and to professional practice; Naturopathic and Homoeopathic organisations: professional accreditation, Health funds and indemnity insurance, peer group associations Australian and international, the current status of Naturopathy and Homoeopathy Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Health politics; an update on recent research into Naturopathy and Homoeopathy; Naturopathy and Homoeopathy and Health education and promotion; alternative perspective's on Health care: osteopathy, chiropractic, physiotherapy,. TCM, Aboriginal medical herbalism; working in various clinical settings.
Required Reading To be advised by Guest Lecturers.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Class presentation (40%); public presentation report (20 %), written assignment (40 %). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH4203 CURRENT RESEARCH TRENDS IN NATURAL MEDICINE
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisites HHH4104 Research Methods; or equivalent.
Content This subject will include the reviewing of the latest research literature into all aspects of naturopathy and homoeopathy, including nutrition, herbals medicine, iridology, body-mind connection in healing, new developments in homoeopathy. Students will review this research enabling them to have an understanding of the development within their industry and its impact on their patients and other medical disciplines.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (50%); class presentation (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHH4204 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMOEOPATHIC CLINICAL INTERNSHIP TWO
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HHH4104 Naturopathic & Homoeopathic Clinical Internship II.
Content During this semester students will assume the role of the practitioner under the guidance of a clinical supervisor and will be required to fulfil all aspects of case taking and assessment, planning a treatment strategy and providing and dispensing the treatment, including all aspects of Naturopathic and Homoeopathic principles as it applies to the individual patient. Students can also have the opportunity to complete their internships in approved overseas settings at their own expense, in India, Nepal and in Europe.
Required Reading British Herbal medicine Association 1984, British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association Publishing. England. Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-drug interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick, Queensland: MediHerb. Health Department Victoria (1990). Health and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department Victoria. Lininger. S. (Ed.). (1999). A-Z Guide to drug-herb-vitamin interactions. USA: Prima Health. Murray, M. (1994). Natural alternatives to over-the-counter and prescription drugs. NY: William Morrow & Co. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby's handbook of herbs & natural supplements. USA: Mosby.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and twenty (120) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of required 120 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.

HHH5105 INTRODUCTION TO CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE
CampusCity Flinders or St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHH5115 Clinical Pharmacology for Herbal Medicine; or equivalent.
Content The aim of this subject is to provide students with a detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations of Chinese herbal classifications and individual herbs. Specific attention will be given to 100 of the most common individual herbs, their energetic actions and functions, clinical application, combinations, preparations, precautions and contra-indications and TGA regulations as they currently exist in Australia.
Required Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994, Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer. Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Materia Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Formulas and Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Drugs, Poisons: Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act 1982, Register of Acupuncture and TCM Code of Ethics.
Recommended Reading Geng, J. Huang, W. Ren, and X. Ma, 1991, Practical Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Medicinal Herbs, Beijing, New World Press. Maciocia, G. 1994, The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one semester comprising of lectures and seminars.
Assessment Three-hour examination, 50%; assignment (2000 words), 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all assessment components.

HHH5115 CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY FOR HERBAL MEDICINE
CampusCity Flinders or St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHH5105 Introduction to Chinese Herbal Medicine; or equivalent.
Content This subject provides students with the opportunity to develop an understanding of the principles underlying the actions of drugs, poisons and xenobiotics relating to the use of Herbal Medicine. The subject will provide an overview of the scope of pharmacology and toxicology with particular emphasis on the interrelationships between herbs and drugs. Topics addressed will include concentration response relationships, adsorption of drugs and xenobiotics, and drug and xenobiotic distribution. The metabolism of xenobiotics including roles in drug elimination, detoxification, production of toxic and mutagenic intermediates, excretion, pharmacokinetics and clearance will also be addressed. The students understanding of drugs used in major diseases in relation to drug mechanisms, basic pharmacokinetics, adverse reactions and interactions known to occur with herbal remedies will also be enhanced. Students will be introduced to the current scheduling process for therapeutic products.
Required Reading Keys, J. 1976, Chinese Herbs. Their Botany, Chemistry and Pharmacodynamics, London, Charles E Tuttle. Evans, W. C., 1996, Trease and Evans' Pharmacognosy, 14th edn., London, WB Saunders. Poisons and Controlled Substances Act. Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons. Galbraith, A. S. Bullock and E. Manias, 1997, Fundamentals of Pharmacology, 2nd edn., Addison-Wesley Longman, Australia.
Recommended Reading Bisset, N. G., ed., Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals, London, CRC Press. Bone, K. 1996, Clinical Applications of Ayurvedic and Chinese Herbs, Phytotherapy Press, Warwick Qld. Chang, H. M. and But, P. P-H. eds., 1987, Pharmacology and Applications of Chinese Materia Medica, Vol. 1 and Vol. 2, World Scientific Publishing. Duke, J. A., 1992, Handbook of Biologically Active Phytochemicals and their Activities, London, CRC Press. Goyen, M., 1991, The Australian Guide to Prescription Drugs, Reed Books, Balgowlah, NSW. Harborne, J. B. and Baxter H. 1993, Phytochemical Dictionary A Handbook of Bioactive Japanese Journal of Pharmacology. Huang, K. C. 1993, The Pharmacology of Chinese Herbs, Boca Raton, CRC Press. Rang, R. R. and Dale, M. M., 1991, Pharmacology, London, Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Two-hour examination, 50%; written assignment (2000 words), 50%.

HHH5125 FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 1
CampusCity Flinders or St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5105 Introduction to Chinese Herbal Medicines, HHH5115 Clinical Pharmacology for Herbal Medicine; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5135 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 2; or equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical reasoning patterns of the following Chinese herbal classifications; diaphoretics (jie biao ji), harmonisers, (he jie ji), heat eliminators (qing re ji), purgatives (xie xia ji) and internal warming formulae (wen li ji). Students will be provided with the opportunity to explore and understand the theoretical underpinnings of the representative formula(e) for each of the herbal classifications, the energetic patterns associated with each of the respective formulae, the theoretical and clinical reasoning patterns explaining the development of modifications to principal formulae, appropriate dosage, treatment strategies, precautions, contra-indications and the issue of patient compliance. In exploring the theoretical foundations of the construction of herbal formulae significant attention will be given to classical sources and modern interpretations to inform student learning. The unit of study also concentrates on the various forms in which prepared Chinese medicines are delivered: pills, powders, soup mixes, decoctions, wines and external applications such as plasters.
Required Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Materia Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Formulas and Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994, Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Hsu, Hong-yen and Hsu, Chau-shin, 1980, Commonly Used Chinese Herb Formulas With Illustrations, California, Oriental Healing Arts Press. Hua, Tuo, 1993, Master Hua's Classic of the Central Viscera. A Translation of Hua Tuo's Zhong Zang Jing, (trans. Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Ki, Suno, 1987, The Canon of Acupuncture Ling Shu, California, Yuin University Press. Li, Dong-yuan, 1993, Treatise of the Spleen and Stomach. A Translation of the Pi Wei Lun, (trans. Yang Shou-zhong and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Liu, Y. C., 1988, The Essential Book of Traditional Chinese Medicine, Vol. 1, New York, Columbia University Press. Maciocia, G. 1994, The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone. Ni, Mao Shing, 1995, The Yellow Emperors Classic of Medicine, Boston, Shambala. Song, Nong, ed., 1996, Chinese Medicated Liquor Therapy, Beijing, Beijing Science and Technology Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 1, Beijing, New World Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing, New World Press. Wu, Jing Nuan, 1993, Ling Shu or Spiritual Pivot, Washington, The Taoist CentreYen, K. Y., 1992, The Illustrated Chinese Materia Medica, Taipei, SMC Publishing Inc. Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile Diseases Caused by Cold: A Classic of Traditional Chinese Medicine, (trans. Luo Xi Wen), Beijing, New World Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one semester comprising of lectures and seminars.
Assessment Two-hour examination, 50%; written assignment (2000 words), 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all assessment components.

HHH5135 FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 2
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5105 Introduction to Chinese Herbal Medicines, HHH5115 Clinical Pharmacology for Herbal Medicine; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 1; or equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical reasoning patterns of the following Chinese herbal classifications; tranquillising/sedation formulae (an shen ji), qi regulators (li qi ji), xue regulators (li xue ji), dampness resolving (qu shi ji) and wind damp eliminators (qu feng shi ji). Students will be provided with the opportunity to explore and understand the theoretical underpinnings of the representative formula(e) for each of the herbal classifications, the energetic patterns associated with each of the respective formulae, the theoretical and clinical reasoning patterns explaining the development of modifications to principal formulae, appropriate dosage treatment strategies, precautions, contra-indications and the issue of patient compliance. In exploring the theoretical foundations of the construction of herbal formulae significant attention will be given to classical sources and modern interpretations to inform student learning. Attention will be given to the various forms in which prepared Chinese medicines are delivered: pills, powders, soup mixes, decoctions, wines and external applications such as plasters.
Required Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Materia Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Formulas and Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994, Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Hua, Tuo, 1993, Master Hua's Classic of the Central Viscera. A Translation of Hua Tuo's Zhong Zang Jing, (trans. Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Institute of Chinese Materia Medica and China Academy of Traditional Chinese Medicine 1989, Medicinal Plants in China, Manila, World Health Organisation, Regional Office for the Western Pacific. Ki, Suno, 1987, The Canon of Acupuncture Ling Shu, California, Yuin University Press. Li, Dong-yuan, 1993, Treatise of the Spleen and Stomach. A Translation of the Pi Wei Lun, (trans. Yang Shou-zhong and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Maciocia, G. 1994, The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone. Ni, Mao Shing, 1995, The Yellow Emperors Classic of Medicine, Boston, Shambala. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 1, Beijing, New World Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing, New World Press. Unschuld, Paul, 1986, Medicine in China. A History of Pharmaceutics, Berkeley, University of California Press. Wu, Jing Nuan, 1993, Ling Shu or Spiritual Pivot, Washington, The Taoist Centre. Xu, Xiang Cai, ed., 1990, English-Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical TCM, Vol. 21, Clinical Dialogue, Beijing, Higher Education Press. Yen, K. Y., 1992, The Illustrated Chinese Materia Medica, Taipei, SMC Publishing Inc. Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile Diseases Caused by Cold: A Classic of Traditional Chinese Medicine, (trans. Luo Xi Wen), Beijing, New World Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one semester comprising of lecture and seminar.
Assessment Two-hour examination, 50%; assignment (2000 words), 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all assessment components.

HHH5225 FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 3
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 1, HHH5135 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 2; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5235 Clinical Specialities (PCM); or equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical reasoning patterns of the following Chinese herbal classifications; tonification formulae (bu yi ji), anti-asthmatic/phlegm resolvers (ding chuan ji/shou hua tan zhi he), resuscitation formulae (kai qiao ji), dyspepsia relieving (xiao dao ji) and astringents (shao lian ji). Students will be provided with the opportunity to explore and understand the theoretical underpinnings of the representative formula(e) for each of the herbal classifications, the energetic patterns associated with each of the respective formulae, the theoretical and clinical reasoning patterns explaining the development of modifications to principal formulae, appropriate dosage treatment strategies, precautions, contra-indications and the issue of patient compliance. In exploring the theoretical foundations of the construction of herbal formulae significant attention will be given to classical sources and modern interpretations to inform student learning. The unit of study also concentrates on the various forms in which prepared Chinese medicines are delivered: pills, powders, soup mixes, decoctions, wines and external applications such as plasters.
Required Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Materia Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Formulas and Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994, Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer. Chen, S. and Li, F. 1993, Clinical Guide to Chinese Herbs and Formulae, London, Churchill-Livingstone. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Hua, Tuo, 1993, Master Hua's Classic of the Central Viscera. A Translation of Hua Tuo's Zhong Zang Jing, (trans. Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Institute of Chinese Materia Medica and China Academy of Traditional Chinese Medicine 1989, Medicinal Plants in China, Manila, World Health Organisation, Regional Office for the Western Pacific. Ki, Suno, 1987, The Canon of Acupuncture Ling Shu, California, Yuin University Press. Li, Dong-yuan, 1993, Treatise of the Spleen and Stomach. A Translation of the Pi Wei Lun, (trans. Yang Shou-zhong and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Maciocia, G. 1994, The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone. Ni, Mao Shing, 1995, The Yellow Emperors Classic of Medicine, Boston, Shambala. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 1, Beijing, New World Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing, New World Press. Unschuld, Paul, 1986, Medicine in China. A History of Pharmaceutics, Berkeley, University of California Press. Wu, Jing Nuan, 1993, Ling Shu or Spiritual Pivot, Washington, The Taoist Centre Xu, Xiang Cai, ed., 1990, English-Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical TCM, Vol. 21, Clinical Dialogue, Beijing, Higher Education Press. Yen, K. Y., 1992, The Illustrated Chinese Materia Medica, Taipei, SMC Publishing Inc. Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile Diseases Caused by Cold: A Classic of Traditional Chinese Medicine, (trans. Luo Xi Wen), Beijing, New World Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one semester comprising of lecture and seminar.
Assessment Two-hour examination 50%; one assignment of 2000 words, 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all assessment components.

HHH5235 CLINICAL SPECIALITIES (PCM)
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 1, HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 2; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5225 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 3; or equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical reasoning patterns of the following specialist areas of practice in Chinese medicine: obstetrics and gynaecology, paediatrics, and orthopaedics and traumatology. Students will be provided with the opportunity to explore, understand and assess critically the theoretical underpinnings of the representative formula(e) for each of the herbal classifications, the energetic patterns associated with each of the respective formulae, the theoretical and clinical reasoning explaining the development of modifications to principal formulae, treatment strategies, appropriate dosage, precautions, contra-indications and the issue of patient compliance. In exploring the theoretical foundations of the construction of herbal formulae significant attention will be given to classical sources and modern interpretations to inform student learning. The unit of study also concentrates on the various forms in which prepared Chinese medicines are delivered: pills, powders, soup mixes, decoctions, wines and external applications such as plasters.
Required Reading Maciocia, Giovanni, 1994, The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994, Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer. Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Materia Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal Medicine-Formulas and Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Feng, T., 1983, Treatment of Soft Tissue Injury with Traditional Chinese and Western Medicine, Beijing, People's Medical Publishing House Press. Flaws, B., 1985, Tieh Ta Ke: Traditional Chinese Traumatology and First Aid, Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B., 1991, Fire in the Valley. The TCM Diagnosis and Treatment of Vaginal Diseases, Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B., 1993, Path of Pregnancy, Vol. 1, A Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gestational and Birthing Diseases, Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Geng, J. Huang, W. Ren, and X. Ma, 1991, Practical Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Medicinal Herbs, Beijing, New World Press. Hsu, Hong-yen and Hsu, Chau-shin, 1980, Commonly Used Chinese Herb Formulas With Illustrations, California, Oriental Healing Arts Press. Hua, Tuo, 1993, Master Hua's Classic of the Central Viscera. A Translation of Hua Tuo's Zhong Zang Jing, (trans. Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Li, Dong-yuan, 1993, Treatise of the Spleen and Stomach. A Translation of the Pi Wei Lun, (trans. Yang Shou-zhong and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Shen, De-hui and N. Wang, 1995, Manual Of Dermatology in Chinese Medicine, Seattle, Eastland Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 1, Beijing, New World Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing, New World Press. Zhang, T. and B. Flaws, trans., 1987, Secret Shaolin Formulae for the Treatment of External Injury, Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile Diseases Caused by Cold: A Classic of Traditional Chinese Medicine, (trans. Luo Xi Wen), Beijing, New World Press. Zheijiang College of Traditional Chinese Medicine 1991, A Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gynaecology, 2nd. edn), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one semester comprising of lecture and seminar.
Assessment One two-hour examination, 50%; one assignment of 2000 words, 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all assessment components.

HHH5245 PCM CLINICAL PRACTICUM
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5225 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 3, HHH5235 Clinical Specialities (PCM) ; or equivalent.
Content This subject provides students with the opportunity to integrate, consolidate and apply the information studied in the previous theoretical subjects under the instruction and guidance of an experienced practitioner of Chinese Herbal Medicine. Students will undertake diagnosis, clinical assessment and develop herbal prescriptions within the clinical setting.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Materia Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal Medicine?Formulas and Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press. Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994, Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Drugs, Poisons: Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act 1982, Register of Acupuncture and TCM Code of Ethics.
Subject Hours The equivalent of eight hours per week for one semester, comprising workshop practicums and case conferences.
Assessment Two practical assessments, satisfactory/unsatisfactory; one journal report of clinical practice undertaken by the student in consultation with an experienced practitioner of Chinese Herbal Medicine, satisfactory/unsatisfactory. Students will be required to gain a pass in all assessment components.

HHI2001 ADVANCED FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and Pathogenesis; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopea; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT2001 Fundamental Herbal Formulas; HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and Pathogenesis 2; RBM2575 Phytopharmaceutics; or equivalents.
Content Additional major formulas, including modifications, scheduled herbs and supplementary pharmacopoeia studies; historical development of formula studies; the traditional formulary methods; formulas and treatment methods; the categories of formulas; the composition and changes of formulae, the types of formulas; usage of formulas. The categories of the traditional formulary (external dispersing, clear heat, downward evacuating, tonifying, harmonising, internal warming, restraining essence, Shen calming, orifice opening, wind managing, dryness managing, Qi regulating, blood regulating, damp dispelling, phlegm dispelling, enrich yin, moisten dryness, reducing food stagnation, parasite expelling).
Required Reading Bensky, D. & Barolet, R. (1990). Chinese herbal medicine, formulas and strategies. Seattle: Eastland Press. Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Xu. H. (2004). Chinese herbal formulas and strategies [workbook]. St Albans: Victoria University of Technology, School of Health Science, TCM Unit.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for two semesters comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Semester One: End-of-semester examination (50%). Semester Two: End-of-semester examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Where any end-of-semester examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on any supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHI3020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE - HERB MAJOR 4
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI2001 Advanced Formulas and Strategies; HHI3010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice - Herb Major 3; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Content During the first week of semester, students will seminars to orient students to this level of the clinical program, to revisit expectations required of them as learners, to review standard operating procedures of the clinical dispensary as preparation for continuation of the clinical program. Reinforce their understanding of the role of acupuncture as an adjunct to their herbal skills and knowledge. Advanced dispensary work: ordering stock in consultation with the supervisor, cost appreciation and prescription accounting.
Required Reading Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/ Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, frli.law.gov.au/
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-eight (78) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle requirement); placement comprising successful completion of required 78 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.

HHI4001 MAJOR CLASSICS - SHANG HAN LUN AND WEN BING
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI2001 Advanced Formulas and Strategies; or equivalent.
Content Shang Han Lun and Wen Bing: The difference between Shang Han and Wen Bing; Zhang Zhong Jing, meaning of Shang Han and Six Channels, the three Yang patterns, the three Yin patterns; concept of Bian Zeng Lun Zhi; warm disease concepts: Ye Tian Shi and Wu Ju Tong, four heat types, Wei Qi Ying Xue, San Jiao, aetiology and outbreak, differentiation, changes through the systems, treatments. Character writing and pronunciation of Chinese medical terminology.
Required Reading Clavey, S. (Trans.). (1988). Venting insubstantial pathogens and deep lying Qi. Special topics in warm disease theory. Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine Education and Research Council, 3, 1-12. Clavey, S. (Trans.). (1988). Deep lying pathogens. Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine Education and Research Council, 3, 12-15. Lei, S.-Y. (1998). More on deep lying pathogens. Treatment of hidden pathogens (S. Clavey, Trans.). Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine Education and Research Council, 3, 3-10. Mitchell, C., Feng, Y., & Wiseman, N. (1999). Shang Han Lun. On cold damage. Translation & Commentaries. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Scheid, V. (1988). Shi Wen Bing. Damp-warm disease (B. Brill, Trans.). Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine Education and Research Council, 3, 7-16. Zhang, Z. J. (1986). Treatise on febrile diseases caused by cold with 500 cases (X.-W. Luo, Trans. & Ed.). Beijing: New World Press. (Original work published circa 250AD)
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Two hours or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and self-directed learning activities.
Assessment One essay (1500 words) (40%); one examination (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHI4002 CHINESE MEDICAL GYNECOLOGY: HERBAL MEDICINE
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties; or equivalent.
Content This subject extends the generic theory subject Chinese Medical Specialties with particular reference to the use of Chinese herbs for gynaecological disorders including menstrual, vaginal, gestational and post-partum disorders. Specific case studies and selected Materia Medica will also be emphasized. This subject is conducted in conjunction with HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1988). Obstetrics and gynecology in Chinese medicine. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Qian, M., & Beer, S. L. (2004 ). TCM gynaecology student work book. Introduction to the use of TCM in gynaecology. Melbourne: Authors.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours or equivalent per week for one semester comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One assignment (1000 words) (50%); final examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHI4003 CHINESE MEDICAL PEDIATRICS AND DERMATOLOGY: HERBAL MEDICINE
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT 3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHT4001 Case Conferencing and Clinical Issues; HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties; or equivalent.
Content This subject extends the generic theory subject Chinese medical specialties with particular reference to the use of Chinese herbs for pediatric and dermatological conditions. This subject is conducted in conjunction with HHT4001 Case Conferencing and Clinical Issues.
Required Reading Hai, J.-L. (Ed.). (1995). Treatment of pediatric disease in TCM. Beijing: Academy Press. Shen D.-H., Wu X.-S., & Wang, N. (1995). Manual of dermatology in Chinese medicine. Seattle: Eastland Press. Xu, X.-C. (Ed.). (1988). Complete external therapies of Chinese drugs. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One assignment (1500 words) (60%); one final examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHI4005 SCHOOLS OF THOUGHT IN CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI3001 Chinese Herbal Medicine Practice; or equivalent.
Content The emphasis of this subject is to look at the practical ways in which classical schools of thought have influenced the practice of Internal Medicine. This subject will explore the Cold Injury School, He Jian School, Yi Shui School, Pathogen attacking School, Dan Xi School, Warming and Reinforcing School, Warm Disease School, Blood Stasis School and other influential approaches. The perspectives of Wu Shiji's External Medicine and Chen Shigong's Wai Ke will also be introduced.
Required Reading Li, D.-Y. (1993). Li Dong-yuan's treatise on the spleen & stomach. A translation of the Pi Wei Lun (S.-Z. Yang & J.-Y. Li, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. State Administration of TCM. (1995). Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 1). Beijing: New World Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Thirty (30) hours or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities. This subject will be delivered in its entirety before the mid-semester break to allow students to undertake their final clinical internship in China.
Assessment One class presentation (50%); one written assignment (1000 words) (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHI4010 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1 - HERB MAJOR
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI3020 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice - Herb Major 4; HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalents.
Content During the first week of semester, students will attend two 2-hour seminars to orientate them to the final level of the clinical program; to review expectations of them in the clinic; to review student ethics and professional behaviour; to review standard operating procedures of the clinical dispensary and system in use for public consultations, in preparation for continuation of the clinical program. Students undertake their final year clinical placement as the Intern Practitioner in approved settings. Much of the placement will be undertaken in the on-campus student clinic. This subject must be completed before off shore clinical placements can be approved. Internship Practitioner: The student practitioner is expected to conduct themselves in the professional manner as demonstrated by Practitioner Clinicians, working under the supervision of a qualified Chinese medicine practitioner. Skills required of the intern practitioner: take all case notes, define diagnosis, herbs and main formulas that the prescription could be based upon, define treatment principles and where appropriate apply acupuncture. The intern practitioner works independently and assumes full responsibility for the conduct of each consultation, and production of a final prescription. The supervising practitioner is accessed as required. Prescriptions must be approved by the supervising practitioner as suitable and safe to dispense for each client consulted, before being processed in the dispensary. Internship Mentor: final year students are to work closely with junior students to assist them in the development of clinical skills. Dispensary supervision- final year students will spend part of their time as supervisor in the dispensary. This will give the Internship practitioner the opportunity to provide mentorship for junior students and assume responsibility for the running of the practice dispensary. While the supervising practitioner has overall authority, the Internship practitioner must liaise with the supervising practitioner for all financial decisions and must report discipline issues. During the mentorship process, the Intern practitioner has the authority to ensure HPU policies and procedures are followed.
Required Reading Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/ Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/ Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, frli.law.gov.au/
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and four (104) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle requirement); placement (50%) comprising successful completion of required 104 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.

HHI4020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2 - HERB MAJOR
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI4010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Internship 1 - Herb Major; or equivalent.
Content During the first week of semester, students will attend a two-hour seminar to orientate them to the final level of the clinical program; to review expectations of them in the clinic; to review student ethics and professional behaviour; to review standard operating procedures of the clinical dispensary and system in use for public consultations, in preparation for continuation of the clinical program. Students undertake their final year clinical placement as the Intern Practitioner in approved settings. Much of the placement will be undertaken in the on-campus student clinic. This subject must be completed before off shore clinical placements can be approved. Internship Practitioner: The student practitioner is expected to conduct themselves in a professional manner, working under the supervision of a qualified Chinese medicine practitioner. Skills required of the intern practitioner: take all case notes, define diagnosis, herbs and main formulas that the prescription could be based upon, define treatment principles and where appropriate apply acupuncture. The intern practitioners work independently and assume full responsibility for the conduct of each consultation, and production of a final prescription. The supervising practitioner is accessed as required. Prescriptions must be approved by the supervising practitioner as suitable and safe to dispense for each client consulted, before being processed in the dispensary. Internship Mentor: Final year students are to work closely with junior students to assist them develop clinical skills. Dispensary supervision: Final year students will spend part of their time as supervisor in the dispensary. This will give the Internship practitioner the opportunity to provide mentorship for junior students and assume responsibility for the running of the practice dispensary. While the supervising practitioner has overall authority. The Internship practitioner must liaise with the supervising practitioner for all financial decisions and must report discipline issues. During the mentorship process, the Internship practitioner has the authority to ensure HPU policies and procedures are followed. Internship observer status: Clinical hours may also be obtained if a student 'observes' clinical practice with a recognized Herbalist with a minimum of 10 years clinical practice (15-20 minimum recommended). The nature of the 'observation' will need to extend to internship status for approval to be granted.
Required Reading Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/ Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/ Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, frli.law.gov.au/
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer
Subject Hours A minimum of two hyndred and eight (208) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement)
Assessment Final dispensary practical examination (10%) (hurdle requirement); final combined practical and oral examination (50%) (hurdle requirement); placement (40%) comprising successful completion of required 208 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactor report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.

HHI4030 CM CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1DH - HERB MAJOR

HHI5001 CLINICAL INTERNAL MEDICINE
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject examines in detail traditional Chinese internal medicine (Nei Ke) based on the system of 52 disorders as specified in the major classic Jin Gui Yao Lue. The traditional classifications and treatment of illnesses - gan mao, ke sou, fei wei, fei yong, xiao zheng, chuan zheng, fei zheng, fei lao, tan yin, zi han, dao han, xue zheng, jing ji, zheng chong, xiong bi, xian zheng, wei tong, ye ge, ou tu, e ni, xie xie, li ji, huo luan, fu tong, bian bi, zhu chong, xie tong, huang dan, ji ju, gu zhang, tou tong, xuan yun, zhong feng, jing bing, ying liu, nue ji, shui zhong, lin zheng, bi zheng, wei zheng, nei shang fa re, xu lao, ben tun qi, bu mei, duo mei, jian wang, jue zheng, yu zheng, dian kuang. Categories of clinical significance will be emphasised and additional disorders of relevance to clinical practice in Australia will be examined. The need to individualise prescriptions is stressed and case histories from the class are used to demonstrate this aspect.
Required Reading Zhang Zhong-jing (circa 150 AD), Luo, X-W (trans) and Chi, J-L (rev) (1986). Synopsis of Prescriptions from the Golden Cabinet (jin gui yao lue). Beijing: New World Press. State Administration of TCM (1996). Advanced textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol III. Internal Medicine. Beijing: New World Press. Tian Delu and Zou Jianhua (Eds.) (2000). Traditional Internal Chinese Medicine. Beijing: Academy Press.
Recommended Reading Chen, S. and Li, F. (1993). Clinical Guide to Chinese Herbs and Formulae. London: Churchill-Livingstone. Macioca, G. (1994). The Practice of Chinese Medicine, The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs. London: Churchill-Livingstone. MacLean, W. and Lyttleton, J. (1998). Clinical Handbook of Internal Medicine. Sydney: UWS Macarthur. Yan, W. and Fischer, W. (1997). Practical Therapeutics of Traditional Chinese Medicine. Brookline: Paradigm.
Subject Hours Two two hour seminars per week for one semester.
Assessment Two seminar presentations (each 25%); one assignment of 1,500 words (20%); final exam (30 %). A pass must be gained for each component of the Assessment

HHI5002 CLINICAL CHINESE MEDICAL GYNAECOLOGY AND DERMATOLOGY
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI5001 Clinical Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Content The development of TCM gynaecology and dermatology; physiology; pathology, aetiology, diagnosis, differentiation of gynaecological conditions; therapeutic principles and methods. Disorders include: menopathies, vaginal disorders, gestational disorders, post-partum disorders, miscellaneous diseases. Case studies. Selected materia medica. With regard to dermatology disorders include: eczema, dermatitis, psoriasis, fungal diseases and other frequently encountered skin disorders. Case studies. Selected materia medica.
Required Reading Flaws, B. (1997). A Handbook of Menstrual Diseases in Chinese Medicine. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Macioca, G. (1988). Obstetrics & Gynaecology in Chinese Medicine. Melbourne: Churchill-Livingstone. Shen De-Hui, Wu Xiu-Sen and Wang, Nissi (1995). Manual of Dermatology in Chinese Medicine. Seattle: Eastland.
Recommended Reading Flaws, B. (1991). Fire in the Valley: The TCM Diagnosis and Treatment of Vaginal Diseases. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B. (1993). Path of Pregnancy, Vol 1. A Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gestational and Birthing Diseases. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Liang J-H. (1988). A Handbook of Traditional Chinese Dermatology. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Xu, Xiang Cai (Chief Ed.) (1990). Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical TCM, Vol 12. Gynaecology. Beijing: Higher Education Press. Xu, Xiang Cai (Chief Ed.) (1990). English-Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical TCM. Vol 16. Dermatology. Beijing: Higher Education Press. Yang, Shou-zhong and Liu, Da-we (trans.) (1992). Fu Qing-zhu's Gynecology. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Zhejiang College of Traditional Chinese Medicine (1991). A Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gynaecology, 2nd edn. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Two seminar presentations (each 25%); assignment of 1,500 words (20%); final exam (30 %). A pass must be gained for each component of the assessment.

HHK2020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE - ACUPUNCTURE 2

HHK3015 CM CLINICAL PRACT - ACPUNCTURE MAJOR 3DH

HHK3020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE - ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR 4
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HHK3010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice - Acupuncture Major 3; HHT2005 Chinese Medicine Asepsis and Sterilization; HHT2006 Acupuncture Needling; or equivalents.
Content Topics include: moxibustion, cupping, gua sha, needle manipulation techniques, the appropriateness of applying other therapeutic methods such as electro-acupuncture, laser therapy, muscle energy testing approaches. Tui Na, shi liao and other micro-systems approaches. Assist practitioner as requested: provide preliminary diagnostic report to the practitioner; carry out therapeutic procedures. Students undertake undertake clinical education in a variety of settings both on and Off Campus Supervision is provided by Victoria University appointed clinical educators, in the Health Practice Unit or other approved locations, or with approved acupuncture practitioners in their private clinics. Herbal formulae prescriptions (prepared and powered extracts).
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine Association Code of Ethics. Available from AACMA Web site, www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm Bensky, D., Gamble, A., & Kaptchuk, T. J. (1993). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (Rev. ed.). Seattle: Eastland Press. Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture - Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-eight (78) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle requirement); placement comprising successful completion of required 78 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and. To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.

HHK3035 CM CLINICAL PRACT: ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR 4DH

HHK3301 ACUPUNCTURE THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS 1

HHK3302 ACUPUNCTURE THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS 2

HHK4001 TREATMENT OF MUSCULO-SKELETAL DISORDERS
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK2003 Musculo-skeletal assessment Skills for Acupuncture; HHK3002 Acupuncture Therapeutic Applications; or equivalents.
Content This subject consolidates theory and practical skills learnt in previous subjects and applies these to the context of specific musculo-skeletal and neurological disorders. The material covered will include the further applications of acupuncture in Wei and Bi syndrome; Zhong Feng; the diagnosis and treatment of specific musculo-skeletal conditions; the application of external herbal preparations; movement exercises specific to particular musculo-skeletal conditions; the protocols and application of electro-acupuncture, point injection therapy, laser therapy, magnet therapy, Tui Na, cupping, moxibustion and Gua Sha as these apply to musculo-skeletal disorders; the treatment and management of sporting injuries.
Required Reading Legge, D. (1990). Close to the bone. Woy Woy: Sydney College Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising seminars, workshops and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One practical exam (40%) (hurdle requirement); one class presentation (20%); one written examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (practical examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHK4002 CHINESE MEDICAL SPECIALTIES: ACUPUNCTURE
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK3002 Acupuncture Therapeutic Applications; HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties; or equivalent.
Content In these specialist areas of study, attention will be given to enhancing the student's theoretical knowledge concerning diagnosis, CM aetiology, treatment principles and management strategies. Ways of selecting acupuncture points, needle techniques and manipulation, application of moxibustion techniques and the role of electro-acupuncture are considered.
Required Reading Hai, J.-L. (Ed.). (1995). Treatment of pediatric disease in TCM. Beijing: Academy Press. Maciocia, G. (1988). Obstetrics and gynecology in Chinese medicine. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Shen, D.-H., Wu, X.-S., & Wang, N. (1995). Manual of dermatology in Chinese medicine. Seattle: Eastland Press. West, Z. (2001). Acupuncture in pregnancy and childbirth. Sydney: Churchill Livingstone. Xu, X.-C. (Ed.). (1988). Complete external therapies of Chinese drugs. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Assignment (1000 words) (45%); theory examination (55%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHK4004 SCHOOLS OF THOUGHT IN ACUPUNCTURE
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK3002 Acupuncture and Therapeutic Applications; or equivalent.
Content Detailed explorations of a broad range of schools of thought from classical and contemporary Chinese medical literature, other Oriental and Western applications. Emphasis will be given to understanding these approaches and their relevance in a contemporary Australian clinical setting. Areas such as Zi wu liu zhu, ling gui ba fa, yuan wu bi lei, the application of the 'Ghost Points' and Japanese approaches are addressed. Special emphasis is given to clinical concerns connected to the notion of two important Chinese medical ideas: dispersing xie Qi and supporting zheng Qi.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1994). The practice of Chinese medicine: The treatment of diseases with acupuncture and Chinese herbs. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Pirog, J. E. (1996). The practical application of meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific View.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Twenty (20) hours or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities. This subject will be delivered in its entirety before the mid-semester break to allow students to undertake their final clinical internship in China.
Assessment One class presentation (50%); one assignment (1000 words) (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHK4010 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1 - ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK3020 Chinese medicine clinical practice - Acupuncture major 4; HHT3001 Internal medicine; or equivalent.
Content During the first two weeks of semester the students will be required to attend a two hour seminar to detail the expectations in this subject, revisit ethical professional issues, and review clinical operating procedures. Students practice as interns under the supervision of approved clinical teachers. Students are required to spend time in at least five of the Victoria University clinical locations in Melbourne to gain broad clinical experience and be guided by a variety of clinical teachers. Skills required: Advanced acupuncture and prepared Chinese medicine theory, needling and Tui Na therapy, excellent interpersonal skills, and a professional attitude and presentation. Practical skills to be developed and assessed: monitoring the consultation process, ability to give supervisors a CM diagnosis of the client they are treating, ability to locate and needle accurately acupuncture points appropriate to the clients needs. Be able to use, and know when to use, moxa, cupping, Gua Sha, point injection therapy, dermal hammer, laser, electric stimulator and prepared Chinese medicine. Assess the client's needs for on going treatment, and be able to communicate with the client their course of treatment. Liaise and work effectively with clinical teachers and mentor students in the clinic.
Required Reading Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture (1997), Melbourne. Health Department Victoria. Williams V. (Ed) (2001) Clinical Policies and Procedures Manual. St Albans TCM Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of Technology.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and four (104) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement). During the first week students will attend three 2-hour seminars in preparation for commencement of their internship studies and practice. From Week 2, students will undertake clinical placement as interns in approved clinical settings
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle requirement); placement comprising successful completion of required 104 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-

HHK4020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2 - ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR
For continuing students only
CampusSt Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HHK4010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Internship 1 - Acupuncture Major; or equivalent.
Content During the first two weeks of semester the students will be required to attend a 2-hour seminar to detail the expectations in this subject, Revisit ethical professional issues, and Review clinical operating procedures. Students practise as interns under the supervision of approved clinical educators. Students are required to spend time in at least five of the Victoria University clinical locations in Melbourne to gain broad clinical experience and be guided by a variety of clinical educators. Skills required: Advanced acupuncture and prepared Chinese medicine theory, needling and Tui Na therapy, excellent interpersonal skills, and a professional attitude and presentation as demonstrated by clinical educators. Practical skills to be developed and assessed: monitoring the consultation process, ability to give supervisors a CM diagnosis of the client they are treating; ability to locate and needle accurately acupuncture points appropriate to the clients needs. Students will be able to use, and know when to use moxa, cupping, Gua Sha, point injection therapy, dermal hammer, laser, electric stimulator and prepared Chinese medicine. Other skills include being able to assess the client's needs for ongoing treatment, to communicate with the client about their course of treatment, to liaise and work effectively with clinical educators and to mentor students in the clinic.
Required Reading Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture - Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of two hundred and eight (208) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Final combined clinical practical and oral examination (hurdle requirement); placement comprising successful completion of required 208 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.

HHK5001 SPORTS & MUSCULO-SKELETAL MEDICINE FOR ACUPUNCTURISTS
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK5115 Acupuncture & Moxibustion 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject consolidates and further develops the student's skills in the Chinese Medical approach to sports performance enhancement and the diagnosis, treatment and management of sports injuries and musculo-skeletal disorders. The material covered will include the application of acupuncture, moxibustion, cupping, electro-acupuncture, point injection therapy, needle threading; through & through needling, needle embedding, tui na, laser therapy, magnet therapy, gua sha, ointments, poultices, plasters, exercise & rest, shi liao and nutritional supplements.
Required Reading Legge, D. (1990). Close to the bone. Woy Woy NSW: Sydney College Press.
Recommended Reading Chen, J. and Wang, N. (Eds.) (1988). Acupuncture Case Histories from China. Seattle: Eastland Press. Chen, JD and Xu, H (1996). The Historical Development of Chinese Diet Pattern and Nutrition from the Ancient to the Modern Society. World Review of Nutrition and Dietetics, Vol 79. Basel Karger. Chen, JD et al. (1990). The effects of Actinidia Sinensis Planch (Kiwi) drink supplementation on athletes training in hot environments. The Journal of Sports Medicine and Physical Fitness, 30(2), 181-184 (Abstract). Chen, JD et al. (1994). Effects of Kiwi compound preparation on exercise performance (Abstract). Asian Sport Sciences Congress, Hiroshima. No 446, 185. Chen, JD et al. (1995). Hawthorn (Shan Zha) drink and its lowering effect on lipid levels in human and rats. In Simopoulos A.P. (Ed), Plants in Human Nutrition. World Review of Nutrition and Dietetics, Vol 77, 147-154. Basel, Karger. Chen, Y. and Deng, L. (Eds.) (1989). Essentials of Contemporary Chinese Acupuncturists' Clinical Experiences. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press. Clogstoun-Wilmott, J. (1987). Food in Traditional Chinese Medicine. Journal Chinese Medicine, 24, 25-30. Deadman, P. and Al-Khafaji, M. (1998). A Manual of Acupuncture. Essex: Journal of Chinese Medicine Publications. Ellis, N. (1994). Acupuncture in Clinical Practice. London: Chapman & Hall. High, D. (1991). The treatment of Zhong Feng. (Unpublished IRP) Victoria University of Technology, St. Albans. Low, R. (1987). The acupuncture treatment of musculo-skeletal conditions. Northamptonshire: Thorsons Publishing. Vangermeersch, L. (1994). Bi Syndrome. Brussels: Satas. Watson, K (1988). Chinese Food Therapy. The Australian Journal of Traditional Chinese Medicine, 4 (1). Xu H et al. (1993). Effects of Poris Cocos (Fuling) preparation on reducing body fat and weight (Abstract). International Conference on Sports Medicine. Beijing China. Yin, H. et al (1992). Fundamentals of Traditional Chinese Medicine. Beijing: Foreign language Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of four hours per week for one semester comprising seminars, practical demonstrations, practice workshops and student presentations.
Assessment One oral practical assessment (35%); one test (35%); and one assignment (30%). A pass must be gained in each component of assessment.

HHK5002 GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS FOR ACUPUNCTURISTS
CampusCity Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK5155 Acupuncture & Moxibustion 2; or equivalent.
Content Gynaecology: This subject consolidates and further develops the student's skills in the Chinese medical approach to gynaecology and obstetrics. Topics covered will include: the development of Chinese medical gynaecology; gynaecological physiology; pathology, aetiology, diagnosis, differentiation of gynaecological conditions; therapeutic principles and methods, disorders including menopathies, vaginal disorders, gestational disorders, post-partum disorders, miscellaneous diseases, and case studies. Obstetrics: Acupuncture obstetrics including contraindications & precautions, acupuncture treatment of disorders during pregnancy and labour, acupuncture induced labour, acupuncture assisted birth, the treatment of pain, anxiety and other conditions during labour, pre and post-natal care, the acupuncturist as part of the neonatal health practitioner team, birth options and settings; cultural perspectives on birth and birthing.
Required Reading Flaws, B. (1997). A Handbook of Menstrual Diseases in Chinese Medicine. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Maciocia, G. (1997). Obstetrics and Gynecology in Chinese Medicine. London: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading California Acupuncture College. (1981). Acupuncture and Herbs for Obstetrics. Los Angeles: California Acupuncture College. Flaws, B. (1991). Fire in the Valley: The TCM Diagnosis and Treatment of Vaginal Diseases. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B. (1993). Path of Pregnancy, Vol 1: A Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gestational and Birthing Diseases. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, Bob (1993). Path of pregnancy Vol. 2: A handbook of traditional Chinese postpartum diseases. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Hou Jing-Lun (ed) (1995). Acupuncture and moxibustion therapy in gynecology and obstetrics. Beijing: Science and Technology Press. Low, R. (1990). Acupuncture in gynaecology and obstetrics. Wellingborough: Thorsons. Watson, K. (1988). Acupuncture and obstetrics. The Australian Journal of Traditional Chinese Medicine, 4(3). Watson, K. (1988). An introduction to TCM gynaecology. The Australian Journal of Traditional Chinese Medicine, 4(2). Wolfe, H.L. (1993). How to have a healthy pregnancy, healthy birth with traditional. Xu, Xiang Cai (Chief Ed.) (1990). Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical TCM, Vol 12: Gynaecology. Beijing: Higher Education Press. Yang, Shou-zhong and Liu, Da-we (trans.) (1992). Fu Qing-zhu's Gynecology. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Yun Jin Hakin, Chris (trans & Ed.) (1998). Handbook of obstetrics and gynecology in Chinese medicine: An integrated approach. Seattle, WA: Eastland Press. Zhejiang College of Traditional Chinese Medicine (1991). A Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gynaecology, 2nd edn. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of four hours per week for one semester comprising seminars, practical demonstrations and practice workshops.
Assessment Seminar presentation (25%); assignment of 1,500 words (25%); final exam (50%). A pass must be gained in each component of assessment.

HHL4029 NUTRITION AND DIET 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHL3919 Pharmacology 1; RBF2739 Biochemistry 2; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to introduce students to nutritional theory and revise the physiology of nutrition. To consider the relationship of food to disease and obtain an overview of eating disorders. At the completion of the subject students should have an understanding of the role of food in disease, what constitutes a balanced diet, and what factors may be involved in eating disorders. content will include: Definition and terms. The balanced diet - omnivore, vegetarian etc. Diet and disease. Nutritional deficiency; aetiology, pathogenesis, prevention and dietary treatment. Obesity. Anorexia and Bulimia. Introduction to concepts of dietary therapy.
Required Reading Wahlqvist, Mark L.(ed.) 1997, Food and Nutrition Australasia, Asia and the Pacific, Allen and Unwin, St. Leonards. Brown, Judith E., 1990, The Science of Human Nutrition, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, USA. Garrow, J.S. and James W.P.T., (eds.) 1996, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, 9th ed., Churchill Livingstone, New York. Mahan, L. Kathleen and Escott-Stump, Sylvia (eds.), 1996, Krause's Food, Nutrition, and Diet Therapy, 9th ed, W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising one one-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial or equivalent.
Assessment Written examination, 60%; assignment, (2000 words) 40%.

HHL4181 RESEARCH 1
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisites HBOS Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:br 1. Explain the gross and developmental anatomy of the nervous system (module 1)
2. Explain the functioning of the nervous system at gross and neural levels (module 1);
3. Apply knowledge in clinical neurology to clinical cases commonly seen in osteopathic practice (module 1);
4. Identify normal and pathological anatomy on diagnostic images (module 2);
5. Competently read radiographs, MRI, CT, ultrasound, bone scans, and other diagnostic images for the diagnosis of congenital anomalies and normal variants, traumatic injuries, scoliosis and infections (module 2);
6. Recognise particular disease states from the identification of abnormalities on scans (module 2).
Content Review of scientific methods; quantitative and qualitative research paradigms; data sampling and collection; questionnaire design; outcome measures used in manual therapy research; qualitative methods: case study, grounded theory, ethnography, focus group; ethical issues and evaluation of research papers; data analysis: descriptive and inferential statistics, correlations and hypothesis testing.
Required Reading Chew, F. (1997). Skeletal radiology: The bare bones (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Eisenberg, R. L., & Johnson, N. M. (2003). Comprehensive radiographic pathology (3rd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Hughes, J., & Hughes, M. (1997). Imaging: Picture tests. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Mace, J. D., & Kowalczyk, N. (1994). Radiographic pathology for technologists (2nd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Redhead, D. N. (1995). Imaging: Colour guide. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Yochum, T. R., & Rowe, L. R. (2005). Yochum and Rowe’s essentials of skeletal radiology (3rd ed., Vols. 1-2). Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Chew, F. (1997). Skeletal radiology: The bare bones (2nd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Eisenberg, R. L., & Johnson, N. M. (2003). Comprehensive radiographic pathology (3rd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Hughes, J., & Hughes, M. (1997). Imaging: Picture tests. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Mace, J. D., & Kowalczyk, N. (1994). Radiographic pathology for technologists (2nd ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby. Redhead, D. N. (1995). Imaging: Colour guide. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Yochum, T. R., & Rowe, L. R. (2005). Yochum and Rowe’s essentials of skeletal radiology (3rd ed., Vols. 1-2). Baltimore, MD: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Class Contact Seventy-two (72) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment One 1-hour laboratory examination (Clinical Neurology, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 15-minute practical slide examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 1-hour written examination (Diagnostic Imaging, 25%, hurdle requirement); one 2-hour final written examination (Clinical Neurology, 25%, hurdle requirement).

HHL4282 RESEARCH 2
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHL4181 Research 1; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Explain data analysis methods relevant to research in osteopathy and related health fields;
2. Describe detailed methods of qualitative and quantitative statistical analysis;
3. Use a statistical computer package for data analysis;
4. Complete a written ethics application for a research proposal.
Content Extension and consolidation of data analysis methods. Quantitative data analysis: revision of descriptive and inferential statistics, correlations and hypothesis testing, general linear model, power and effect, analysis of variance and covariance multivariate designs, nonparametric data analysis and selection of nonparametric tests, practical use of the SPSS statistical computer package. Qualitative data analysis: major qualitative methodologies, techniques in data collection and analysis.
Required Reading American Psychological Association. (2001). Publication manual of the American Psychological Association (5th ed.). Washington, DC: Author.
OR
APA Style Sheet. (2004). Available from Dr. Abel Scribe PhD Web site, www.docstyles.com/apacrib.htm
Aron, A., & Aron, E. N. (1999). Statistics for psychology (2nd ed.). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Coakes, S. J., & Steed, L. G. (2003). SPSS: Analysis without anguish: Version 11.0 for Windows. Milton, Australia: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Jenkins, S., Price CJ, & Straker L. (1998). The researching therapist. A practical guide to planning, performing and communicating research. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Burdess, N. (1994). The really understandable stats book. Australia: Prentice Hall.
Campbell, M.J., & Machin, D. (1993). Medical statistics: A commonsense approach (2nd ed.). Chichester, UK: John Wiley.
Domholdt, E. (2000). Physical therapy research: Principles and applications (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: WB Saunders.
Graziano, A. M., & Raulin, M. L. (1989). Research methods: A process of inquiry. New York: Harper Collins.
Kuzma, J. W., & Bohnenblust, S. E. (2004). Basic statistics for the health sciences. (5th ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill.
Munro, B. H. (1997). Statistical methods for health care research (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott.

Class Contact Sixty (60) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and self-directed learning.
Assessment Submission of a written ethics application (hurdle requirement); one written assignment (40%); one 2-hour written examination (60%).

HHL4939 RESEARCH 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHM3439 Biometry 3; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to assist and facilitate the preparation of a proposal and ethics documentation for the minor thesis required for the completion of the Master of Health Science - Osteopathy course. By the end of the year the students should have successfully completed their Masters by coursework proposals and ethics documents, and should be working on data collection. content will include: Preparation of a research project proposal and ethics documentation including the necessary literature search. The project itself is to be completed during Year 1 of the Masters Degree either as a minor dissertation or as a paper for publication. The project will need to be presented to the Ethics and Research Committee and passed by that committee prior to being implemented.
Required Reading As for HHM3439 Biometry 3.
Recommended Reading This will depend on the research topic to be undertaken. It should have some reference to osteopathy.
Subject Hours Two hours of tutorial/workshop & two hours self-directed study with access to supervisors per week for semester one. two hrs self-directed study with access to supervisors per week for semester two.
Assessment Oral presentation of project proposal, acceptance of proposal 50%and ethics documentation, 50%

HHL5183 RESEARCH 3
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
PrerequisitesHHL4282 Research 2; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Independently progress the data collection and analysis phases of research;
2. Produce a working draft of a thesis.
Content Following receipt of ethics committee approval, students will complete data collection and analysis appropriate to their individual research projects and write a draft of the thesis, which in its final form will be a 12,000-20,000 word thesis of a standard consistent with publication in a peer reviewed journal.
Required Reading There are no set texts for this unit. Reading will be influenced by the nature of the research project undertaken by the student.
American Psychological Association. (2001). Publication manual of the American Psychological Association (5th ed.). Washington, DC: Author.
OR
APA Style Sheet. (2004). Available from Dr. Abel Scribe PhD Web site, www.docstyles.com/apacrib.htm.

Recommended Reading Aron, A., & Aron, E. N. (1999). Statistics for psychology (2nd ed.). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Burdess, N. (1994). The really understandable stats book. Australia: Prentice Hall.
Campbell, M.J., & Machin, D. (1993). Medical statistics: A commonsense approach (2nd ed.). Chichester, UK: John Wiley.
Coakes, S. J., & Steed, L. G. (2003). SPSS: Analysis without anguish: Version 11.0 for Windows. Milton, Australia: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Domholdt, E. (2000). Physical therapy research: Principles and applications (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: WB Saunders.
Graziano, A. M., & Raulin, M. L. (1989). Research methods: A process of inquiry. New York: Harper Collins.
Jenkins, S., Price, C. J., & Straker, L. (1998). The researching therapist. A practical guide to planning, performing and communicating research. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Kuzma, J. W., & Bohnenblust, S. E. (2004). Basic statistics for the health sciences. (5th ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill.
Munro, B. H. (1997). Statistical methods for health care research (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Class Contact Sixty (60) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising independent research, meetings with supervisors, and tutorials and workshops as required.
Assessment Two satisfactory progress reports from supervisor(s) (week 5, end-of-semester) (hurdle requirement).

HHL5284 RESEARCH 4
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
PrerequisitesHHL5183 Research 3; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Independently produce a scholarly piece of original writing (thesis of 12,000-20,000 words) relevant to the discipline of health science;
2. Engage in further research activities and research training.
Content Students having undertaken an individual research project in earlier HHL4181, HHL4282 & HHL5183 Research units will use this unit to complete the (12000-20000 word) minor thesis component of the degree. The thesis will provide evidence of independent academically rigorous research, which demonstrates the ability to define a problem, undertake a detailed literature review, develop a research design appropriate to the topic and collect and analyse, interpret and present data. The thesis should demonstrate a high standard of written communication skills consistent with publication in a peer reviewed journal. Presentation of the thesis should be in a conventional scientific format. An oral PowerPoint presentation is also required.
Required Reading There are no set texts for this unit. Reading will be influenced by the nature of the research project undertaken by the student
American Psychological Association. (2001). Publication manual of the American Psychological Association (5th ed.). Washington, DC: Author.
OR
APA Style Sheet. (2004). Available from Dr. Abel Scribe PhD Web site, www.docstyles.com/apacrib.htm
Recommended Reading Aron, A., & Aron, E. N. (1999). Statistics for psychology (2nd ed.). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Burdess, N. (1994). The really understandable stats book. Australia: Prentice Hall.
Campbell, M.J., & Machin, D. (1993). Medical statistics: A commonsense approach (2nd ed.). Chichester, UK: John Wiley.
Coakes, S. J., & Steed, L. G. (2003). SPSS: Analysis without anguish: Version 11.0 for Windows. Milton, Australia: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Domholdt, E. (2000). Physical therapy research: Principles and applications (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: WB Saunders.
Graziano, A. M., & Raulin, M. L. (1989). Research methods: A process of inquiry. New York: Harper Collins.
Jenkins, S., Price, C. J., & Straker, L. (1998). The researching therapist. A practical guide to planning, performing and communicating research. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Kuzma, J. W., & Bohnenblust, S. E. (2004). Basic statistics for the health sciences. (5th ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill.
Munro, B. H. (1997). Statistical methods for health care research (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott.

Class Contact Sixty (60) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising independent research, meetings with supervisors, and tutorials and workshops as required.
Assessment Satisfactory progress report from supervisor(s) (hurdle requirement); one oral PowerPoint presentation of project (20%) (hurdle requirement); one minor thesis (12,000-20,000 words) (80%) (hurdle requirement). Examination of the minor thesis will be in accordance with the policies outlined by the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science and the School of Health Sciences.

HHL5959 RESEARCH 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHM3439 Biometry 3; HHL4939 Research 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to facilitate the successful completion of the Masters of Health Science - Osteopathy minor thesis. By the end of this course the students should have completed their minor thesis, and will have acquired the research skills necessary for further research projects. The minor research thesis which was prepared during in the year one of the Master of Health Science - Osteopathy, should be completed and written up for assessment. All students are expected to complete the project as a minor thesis or paper for publication. Supervisors will assist where necessary.
Required/Recommended Reading Aron, A. & Aron, E.N. (1999) Statistics for Psychology. 2nd Ed. Prentice Hall, New Jersey; Burdess, N. (1994) The Really Understandable Stats Book. Prentice Hall, Australia; Campbell MJ, Machin D (1993) Medical statistics: A commonsense approach, 2nd ed. John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, UK; Coakes SJ and Steed LG (2003) SPSS : analysis without anguish : version 11.0 for Windows John Wiley & Sons, Milton, Qld; Domholdt E (2000) Physical Therapy Research. Principles and Applications. 2nd ed. WB Saunders, Philadelphia, PA; Graziano, A.M., & Raulin, M.L. (1989) Research methods: A process of inquiry. Harper Collins, New York; Jenkins, S., Price, C.J. & Straker, L. (1998) The Researching Therapist. A practical guide to planning, performing and communicating research. Churchill Livingstone; Kuzma, J. (1990) Statistics in Health Sciences. Mayfield, California; Munro B H (1997) Statistical methods for health care research, 3rd ed. Lippincott, Philadelphia, PA. Any other reading will depend on the topic to be undertaken, which will form the basis of the review of literature, methodology and discussion.
Subject Hours Five hours per week over two semesters. This is independent research in addition to regular meetings with student supervisors throughout the duration of the subject.
Assessment Oral Presentation of Project: 30%; Written presentation of Thesis (12,000-20,000 words) or Treatise (4000-5000 words): 70%. All work will be assessed by examiner(s) selected by the Subject co-ordinator who are independent of the work submitted.

HHM6000 NURSING ENQUIRY AND KNOWLEDGE
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject is designed to encourage students to examine critically some of the theories and ideologies that influence the development of the various kinds of knowledge. The subject also aims to enable students to generate and apply nursing knowledge through the process of theory analysis and development. Topics covered in this subject include: intellectual culture - contextual knowledge; the nature, creation and legitimation of knowledge; nursing 'knowledge''; nursing theories and their application to practice; future directions.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Barnett, R.A. et al. 1978, Models of professional preparation: pharmacy, nursing and teacher education, Studies in Higher Education 12(1): 51-63. Benner, P. 1984, From Novice to Expert: Excellence and Power in Clinical Nursing Practice, Menlo Park, California. Berger, P. and Luckmann, T. 1971, The Social Construction of Reality, Penguin, London. Capra, F. 1983, The Turning Point: Science, Society and the Rising Culture, Flamingo (Fontana), London. Carper, B. 1978, Fundamental Patterns of Knowing in Nursing: Advances in Nursing Science, Aspen, California. Charlesworth, M. 1982, Science, Non-Science and Pseudoscience, Deakin Uni Press, Geelong. Chinn, P.L. and Jacobs, M.K. 1987, Theory and Nursing: A Systematic Approach, C.V.Mosby, St Louis. Collins, R.J. and Fielder. J.H. 1981, Beckstrand's concept of practice theory, a critique, Research in Nursing and Health 4(3): Sept 317-21. Crowley, D.J. 1986, Perspectives of pure science, Nursing Research 17: 497-9, Nov-Dec. Fitzpatrick, J. and Whall, A. 1983, Conceptual Models of Nursing: Analysis and Application, Roberts Brady Co., Bowie Md. Freidson, E. 1986, Professional Powers: A Study of the Institutionalisation of Formal Knowledge, Uni of Chicago Press. George, J.B. (ed.) 1985, Nursing Theories: The Base for Professional Nursing Theories, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Gjertsen, D. 1989, Science and Philosophy: Past and Present, Penguin, London. Gwen, S. (ed.) 1990, A Reader in Feminist Knowledge, Routledge, London. Kuhn, T. 1970, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, Uni of Chicago Press. Meleis, A.I. 1985, Theoretical Nursing: Development and Progress, Lippincott, Philadelphia. Nicoll, L. 1987, From Grounded Theory to Practice, Little Brown, Boston. Nightingale, F. 1968 (original 1859), Notes on Nursing: What it is and what it is not, Dover, New York. Orem, D.E. 1980, Nursing: Concepts of Practice, McGraw Hill, New York. Passmore, J. 1986, A Hundred Years of Philosophy, Penguin, London. Parse, R.R. 1987, Nursing Science: Major Paradigms, Theories and Critique, W B Saunders Co., Philadelphia Pa. Ramazanoglu, C. 1989, Feminism and the Contradictions of Oppression, Routledge, London. Remmling, E.W. 1973, Towards the Sociology of Knowledge, Routledge and Kegan Paul, London. Riehl, J.P. and Roy, C. 1980, Conceptual Models for Nursing Practice, Appleton-Century-Crofts, New York. Schon, D. 1982, The Reflective Practitioner: How Professionals Think in Action, Basic Books. New York. Stanley, L. (ed.) 1990, Feminist Praxis, Routledge, London. Stevenson, L. 1980, Seven Theories of Human Nature, Oxford University Press. Stevenson, L. (ed.) 1981, The Study of Human Nature, Oxford University Press. Suppe, F. 1977, The Structure of Scientific Theories, Chicago University of Illinois Press. Tong, R. 1989, Contemporary Feminist Thought, Allen and Unwin, Sydney. Trigg, R. 1985, Understanding Social Science, Blackwells, Oxford. Watson, J. 1980, The Philosophy and Science of Caring, Little Brown and Co., Boston. Weedon, C. 1987, Feminist Practice and Poststructuralist Theory, Blackwell, Oxford. Young, M.F.D. (ed.) 1971, Knowledge and Control, Collier-Macmillan, London. Zukav, G. 1988, The Dancing Wu Li Masters, Fontana, London.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising a variety of teaching strategies including lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment Paper and seminar presentation, 50%; written paper, 50%.

HHM6800 RESEARCH THESIS (FULL-TIME)
CampusFootscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a suitably formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and formulated; the investigation described in detail; results and conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended discussion presented. Students may be required to undertake some lecture courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular meetings with the student supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.

HHM6801 RESEARCH THESIS (PART-TIME)
CampusFootscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a suitably formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and formulated; the investigation described in detail; results and conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended discussion presented. Students may be required to undertake some lecture courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular meetings with the student supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.

HHN0011 PHILOSOPHICAL CONCEPTS IN NATURAL MEDICINE
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Approaches to healing throughout the world are embedded in notions of reality, truth, and values about health and illness. The subject explores the philosophies that underpin the major traditions of health and healing. Students are provided with the opportunity to explore and critically appraise the various philosophies. Areas of inquiry will include the general principles of: Oriental Medicine: Chinese and Japanese healing; Ayurveda and Yoga: Indian and Pranic healing; Naturopathy: European natural therapy; Australian Aboriginal healing; Western healing; Shamanistic healing practices. The opportunity to explore the philosophies underlying health and healing practices will provide a broad foundation for the study of the sensory and cognitive healing approaches in the course.
Required Reading Capra, F. (1983). The turning point: Science, society and the rising culture. London: Fontana. Wilber, K. (1996). A brief history of everything. Melbourne: Hill of content.
Recommended Reading Ackernecht, E. (1982). A Short History of Medicine. John Hopkins University Press Baltimore. Benoist, J., Cathebras, P. (1993). The Body from Immateriality to Another Social Science and Medicine (UK), 39(7), 857-65. Capra, F. (1983). The Tao of Physics. London Fontana Paperbacks. Charlesworth, M. (1982). Science, Non Science and Pseudoscience. Deakin University Press Geelong. Chopra, D. (1989). Quantum Healing: Exploring the Frontiers of Medicine. Bantan Books New York. Clifford, T. (1989). The Diamond Healing: Tibetan Buddhist Medicine and Psychiatry. Woolnough Northamptonshire. Eagle, R. (1978). Alternative Medicine Guide to the Medical Underground. Future Publications Great Britain. Griggs, B. (1981). Green Pharmacy: A History of Herbal Medicine. London Robert Hale. Grossinger, R. (1980). Plant Medicine. North Atlantic Books Berkeley. Holbrook, B. (1981). The Stone Monkey: An Alternative Chinese-Scientific Reality. William Morrow New York. Kaptchuk, T. J. (1983). Chinese Medicine: The Web that Has No Weaver. Congdon and Week New York. Manning, C. & Vanrenen, L. (1988). Bioenergetic Medicine East and West. North Atlantic Books California. McClenon, J. (1993). The Experiential Foundations of Shamanic Healing. Journal of Medical Philosophy, 18(2), 107-270. Payer, L. (1989). Medicine and Culture. Victor Gollancz London. Wilber, K. (1989). The Spectrum of Consciousness. Wheaton Illinois Theosophical Publishing House. Wilber, K. (1990) Eye to Eye-The Quest for the New Paradigm. Shambhala Boston. Zukav, G. (1988). The Dancing Wu Li Master. Fontana London.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Personal reflective journal (hurdle requirement); class participation/group work (20%); written assignment (2000 words) (80%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHN0012 ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The Law and Health Care, Introduction to Ethics, Ethics and Law in Health practice, Consent, Negligence, Foregoing and withdrawing treatment, Dying and the law, Mental health, Confidentiality, Employment: legal and ethical obligations, Resource allocation.
Required Reading Beauchamp, T. L., & Childress, J. F. (1994). Principles of biomedical ethics (4th ed.). New York: Oxford University Press. Eburn, M. (1999). Emergency law. Marrickville, NSW: The Federation Press. Wallace, M. (1995). Health care and the law (2nd ed.). North Ryde, NSW: Law Book Company.
Recommended Reading Recommended Reading that includes textbooks, Journals and Web sites will be posted in the Subject Information folder within the coursework section of this subject prior to the commencement of each semester.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Online or face-to-face presentation (30%); written assignment (70%).

HHN0013 RESEARCH SKILLS
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Evaluation of the health care professionals role in the research process and the significance of research to health care. Discussion of the different trends and issues within health care research. Exploration of legal and ethical considerations in research. Examination of qualitative and quantitative research methods. Consideration of how research ideas/questions can be generated and which research methodology may be appropriate. Data analysis and Computation. Prepare a literature based research proposal.
Required Reading Polgar, S. & Thomas, S. (1995). Introduction to research in the health science. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Paton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods. NY: Sage Publications.
Recommended Reading DePoy, E. & Gitlin, L. (1994). Introduction to Research: Multiple Strategies for Health and Human Services. St Louis Mosby. Marlin, P. & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical Statistics for the Health Sciences. Melbourne Thomas Nelson. Minichiello, V., et al. (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching People. Melbourne Longman Cheshire. Wilson, H. S. (1989). Introducing Research in Nursing. California Addison and Wesley Publishing Company. Woods, N. F. & Catanzo, M. (1988). Nursing Research: Theory and Practice. St Louis CV Mosby and Company.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Seminar presentation and class participation (30%); written proposal submission (70%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (proposal submission) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHN0014 DEVELOPING PHARMACOLOGICAL UNDERSTANDING IN NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTICE
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Drug interactions and contraindications of use, understanding pharmacology and its interactions upon the endocrine system, the nervous system, and the circulatory system. Endocrinology of the function and pathology of the endocrine glands, hormones and the associated diseases and conditions.
Required Reading Birkett, D. J. (1995) Pharmacodynamics: The concentration effect relationship. Australian Prescriber. Chahl, L. A. (1996). Experimental and Clinical Pharmacology: Opioids - Mechanisms of Actions. Australian Prescriber, 19, 3: 66-68. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied health professionals (4th ed.). Australia: Pearson Education Australia.
Websites www.australianprescriber.com/magazines/vol18no4/concentration.htm www. australianprescriber.com/magazines/vol19no3/opioids.htm
Recommended Reading Students will be informed of further Recommended Reading by the lecturer which will include textbooks, Journals and Websites.
Subject Hours A minimum of ninety-six (96) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Class presentation and participation (20%); written assignment(s) (80%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignments) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHN0021 COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS
Campus St Albans, Off Campus.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content An introduction to the role of the counsellor and relationship between the client and practitioner. The following theories will be covered: Psychoanalytic, Alderian, Existential, Person Centred, Gestalt, Reality, Behavioral, Cognitive, Family systems, Ego State Therapies, as well as meditation, relaxation therapy. Ethical and legal issues of counselling.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1997). Theory and Practice of Counselling and Psychotherapy. 5th Ed, Brooks/Cole Pub Co, California, USA. Corsini, R. J. & Wedding, D. (eds), (1998). 5th Edition. Current Psychotherapies. F.E. Peacock Publisher Inc. Illinois.
Recommended Reading Grof, S. with Bennett, H.Z. (1990). The Holotropic Mind. Harper Collins, San Francisco. Hammer, L. (1990). Dragon Rises, Red Bird Flies. Station Hill Press, New York. Wilber, K. (1989). The Spectrum of Consciousness. Theosophical Publishing House, Wheaton, Illinois. Wilber, K. (1975). Psychological Perennis: The spectrum of consciousness. The Journal of Transpersonal Psychology 7(2). Additional reading as directed by the lecturer.
Subject Hours The equivalence of 39 hours per semester delivered in burst mode over two weeks or over one semester of 13 weeks.
Assessment Seminar presentation (15%); class participation (25%); written theory assignment (1500 words) (40%); reflective journal (20%). A pass must be gained for each component of the assessment.

HHN0022 PROFESSIONAL WRITING IN NATURAL MEDICINE
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Preparing a journal article based on the evaluation of professional literature in the field of Natural Medicine. Discuss and understand the process of writing a paper(s). Understand library research skills, professional writing and reading skills.
Required Reading Anderson, J. & Poole, M. (1995). Thesis and assignment writing. (2nd ed.). Brisbane: John Wiley & Sons. Paton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods. NY: Sage Publications. Polgar, S., & Thomas S. (1995). Introduction to research in the health science. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Australian Traditional Medicine society, et al. (2000) Journal of the Australian Traditional-Medicine Society. A.T.M.S. N.S.W. Clavey, S. et al. (2000). Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine Education and Research Council, Ltd. Melbourne A.CM.E.R.C. Marlin, P. & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical Statistics for the Health Sciences. Melbourne Thomas Nelson. Minichiello, V., et al. (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching People. Melbourne Longman Cheshire. Williams, J. M. (1997). Style-Ten Lessons in Clarity and Grace (5th ed. ). New York Addison-Wesley Educational Publishers inc. Additional reading as directed by the lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and eight (108) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment One written assignment (2500 words) (100%) or one written journal article (1500 words) (50%); and a written assignment (1000 words) (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHN0023 RESEARCH PROJECT
CampusSt Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Students will undertake a task based on professional experience and/or the professional literature and produce a research project. Students are expected to prepare a proposal. On acceptance of the proposal students are expected to develop this into a research project. Interaction between facilitator and students is essential.
Required Reading Paton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods. NY: Sage Publications. Polgar, S., & Thomas S. (1995). Introduction to research in the health science. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading DePoy, E. & Gitlin, L. (1994). Introduction to research: Multiple Strategies for Health and Human Services. St Louis Mosby. Marlin, P. & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical Statistics for the Health Sciences. Melbourne Thomas Nelson. Minichiello, V., et al. (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching People. Melbourne Longman Cheshire. Wilson, H. S. (1989). Introducing Research in Nursing. California Addison and Wesley Publishing Company. Woods, N. F. & Catanzo, M. (1988). Nursing research: Theory and Practice. St Louis CV Mosby and Company. Additional reading as directed by the Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and thirty-two (132) hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Class presentation of project (20%); minor research project assignment (5000 words) (80%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.

HHO1171 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject aims to introduce student to the Osteopathic principles both theoretical and based on research. Development of the conceptual framework of osteopathy and an understanding of osteopathic philosophy. Consideration of the functioning of the individual as a whole. ART and the application of this principle to patient care. Somatic dysfunction and ita diagnosis including barrier principles. Contraindications of to osteopathic care both absolute and relative. Students will develop palpatory skills and awareness of tissue characteristics both normal and abnormal. Research and presentation skills relating to the published literature on palpation will be developed. Basic soft tissue techniques applicable to the tissues of the musculoskeletal system. The use of leverages to induce motion within these tissues. Emphasis is placed on palpatory skills, osteopathic articulatory and soft tissue techniques, surface anatomy and tissue awareness. The palpation and technique components will augment and reinforce anatomy learnt in the subject Anatomy 1.
Required Reading Chaitow L (1997) Palpation Skills New York Churchill Livingstone Field D (1994) Anatomy - Palpation and Surface Markings London, Butterwoth-Heinemann Greenman P (1989) Principles of Manual Medicine Baltimore Williams and Wilkins Hoppenfeld S (1976) Physical Examination of the Spine and Extremities. Norwalk Connecticut Appleton-Century Crofts Kuchera W The Philosophy of Osteopathy Kirksville College of Osteopathic Medicine USA Lederman E (1997) Fundamentals of Manual Therapy New York Churchill Livingstone Lumley JSP (1996) Surface Anatomy Edinburgh Churchill Livingstone. Tucker C & Deoora T K (1994) Fundamental osteopathic techniques Research Publications Pty Ltd Melbourne, Australia Victoria University Osteopathy Unit Student Manual 2004.
Recommended Reading Basmajian J, Nyberg R (1993) Rational Manual Therapies Williams & Wilkins Hartman L S (1996) Handbook of Osteopathic Technique Chapman & Hall London
Hawkins P, O'Neill A (1990) Osteopathy in Australia P.I.T. Press Victoria Hoag J M (1969) Osteopathic Medicine McGraw-Hill New York Korr I M (1969) The Physiological Basis of Osteopathic Medicine Post-graduate Institute of Osteopathic Medicine New York Neumann H D (1989) Introduction to Manual Medicine Springer-Verlag Berlin Tixa S (1999) Atlas of palpatory anatomy of the lower extremities. McGraw-Hill, New York.
Subject Hours Seven hours per week for two semesters: one hour lecture- History & Principles; two-hour workshop - Osteopathic Palpation; four hours workshop (2 x- Osteopathic Technique). Osteopathic science 1 is a clinically oriented subject and as a consequence material presented within clinical practicum 1 tutorials will necessarily augment and support Osteopathic Science 1 course content.
Assessment Written examination - History & Principles; Assignment - History & Principles (2000 words); Presentation & paper critiques - Palpation; Practical Examinations - Palpation and Osteopathic Technique. Students must gain a mandatory pass, or better, in all components of assessment before they can be awarded an overall pass within the subject title: Osteopathic Science 1.
Please note that Osteopathic Science 1 is a two semester subject. First semester passing grades will appear on academic transcripts as X. First semester fail grades will appear as N1 or N2, and will be amended if the subject is passed in entirety at the end of the academic year. First semester grades will be published by the lecturer after the meeting of the examination board.

HHO1272 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 2
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
Prerequisites Satisfactory completion of first semester of the HBOS degree; or equivalent.
Co-requisites HHA1272 Anatomy 2, HHD1271 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 1, HHU1272 Clinical Practicum 2, RMS1272 Biochemistry (Osteopathy) 2, or equivalents;
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to: 1. Discuss osteopathic principles at a level higher than basic;
2. Name, identify and palpate the major anatomical structures and landmarks;
3. Describe the major anatomical structures and landmarks, including in plain language;
4. Demonstrate soft tissue and articulatory techniques for prescribed areas of the musculoskeletal system: thorax, lumbar, pelvic and lower limb;
5. Adapt osteopathic soft tissue and articulatory techniques to accommodate patients’ needs and preferences.
Content This unit comprises three modules: Module 1: Technique; Module 2: Palpation; and Module 3: History and Principles. Module 1: Students will continue to develop osteopathic diagnostic skills, palpatory skills including awareness of normal and abnormal tissue characteristics, and articulatory technique skills applied to the following musculoskeletal regions: thorax, lumbar, pelvis and lower limb. Module 2: The Technique and Palpation components will augment and reinforce anatomy presented in the unit Anatomy 2. Module 3: Continued development of the conceptual framework of osteopathy and an understanding of osteopathic history and philosophy.
Required Reading Chaitow, L. (1997). Palpation skills. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Field, D. (2001). Anatomy, palpation and surface markings (3rd ed.). London: Butterworth-Heinemann. Greenman, P. (2003). Principles of manual medicine (3rd ed.). Baltimore, MD: Williams and Wilkins. Hoppenfeld, S. (1976). Physical examination of the spine and extremities. Norwalk, CN: Appleton-Century Crofts Kuchera, W. A. (n.d.). The philosophy of osteopathy. Kirksville, MO: Kirksville College of Osteopathic Medicine. Lederman, E. (2005). The science and practice of manual therapy (2nd ed.). New York: Churchill Livingstone. Lumley, J. S. P. (2002). Surface anatomy (3rd ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Tucker, C., & Deoora, T. K. (1994). Fundamental osteopathic techniques. Melbourne, Australia: Research Publications.
Recommended Reading Basmajian, J. V., & Nyberg, R. E. (Eds.). (1993). Rational manual therapies. Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins. Hartman, L. S. (1996). Handbook of osteopathic technique. London: Chapman & Hall. Hawkins, P., & O'Neill, A. (1990). Osteopathy in Australia. Victoria, Australia: P. I. T. Press. Hoag, J. M. (1969). Osteopathic medicine. New York: McGraw-Hill. (out of print) Korr, I. M. (1969). The physiological basis of osteopathic medicine. New York: Post-graduate Institute of Osteopathic Medicine. Neumann, H. D. (1989). Introduction to manual medicine. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Tixa, S. (1999). Atlas of palpatory anatomy of the lower extremities. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Seven (7) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); one combined practical and oral mock examination (OSCE format) (Technique) (pass/fail formative assessment); three quizzes (History and Principles) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); one peer-assessed written assignment (History and Principles) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); one 40-minute combined practical and oral examination (OSCE format) (20 minutes Technique; 20 minutes Palpation) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement).

HHO1529 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 1

HHO2173 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 3
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims: To consolidate and develop knowledge gained in HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1. To introduce high velocity, low amplitude thrust techniques for various joints. To further explore osteopathic history and principles. To introduce the students to the full osteopathic physical examination. At the completion of the subject students should have a thorough understanding of osteopathic history and principles. They should be able to carry out an osteopathic physical examination, and should be capable of carrying out the major high velocity low amplitude thrust techniques. content will include: Further development of osteopathic manual soft tissue skills and the uses of leverage in treatment regimes. Continued refinement of treatment approaches to effect reflex and structural changes in muscle. Introduction to the use of high velocity thrust techniques applicable to the spine. Stress is placed upon observation prior to palpation and the need to recognise the anatomical relationships of one region of the body to others. Osteopathic principles and application of forces to all soft tissues and joints of the body to normalise mechanics. Contraindications to the use of osteopathic techniques. Application and interpretation of tests and protocols relating to patient safety. Further exploration of the principles and practice of osteopathic medicine as distinct from allopathic and other complementary therapies. The role of the Autonomic Nervous System in relation to osteopathic principles and practice. Introduction to the osteopathic case history, examination and tissue diagnosis. Joint biomechanics - classification, structure and function, abnormalities of function, biomechanics of individual joints. The vertebral unit & somatic dysfunction. Spinal biomechanics - development of normal curves, assessment of posture both static and dynamic, assessment of occupational stresses. Peripheral Joint biomechanics, assessment, diagnosis and integrated treatment approach to peripheral joint lesions. Abnormal spinal mechanics - congenital, acquired, developmental. Clinical assessment of joints of the spine and extremities. Review of surface and regional anatomy. High Velocity Low Amplitude techniques to the spine.
Required Reading DiGiovanna E and Schiowitz E (1991) An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia. Greenman P (1996) Principles of Manual Medicine 2nd ed.Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Lederman E (1997) Fundamentals of Manual Therapy Churchill Livingstone New York. Refshauge K and Gass E (1995) Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy. Clinical Science and Practice. Butterworth Heinemann Oxford. Stoddard A (1983) Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd ed London. Stoddard A (1980) Manual of Osteopathic Technique Hutchinson 3rd ed London. Tucker C and Deoora T K (1994) Fundamental osteopathic techniques Research Publications Pty Ltd Melbourne, Australia. Ward R C (Ed) (1997) Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Cailliet R (1987) Soft Tissue Pain and Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Low Back Pain Syndrome F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Knee Pain and Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Neck and Arm pain F A Davis Philadelphia. Walton W J (1989) Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy, Col.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for two semesters comprising lectures, laboratory/practical workshops and tutorials. Osteopathic Science 2 is a clinically oriented subject and as a consequence material presented within Clinical Practicum 2 tutorials will necessarily augment and support Osteopathic Science 2 subject content.
Assessment Written examination, practical assessment. A pass in all components must be achieved before an overall pass can be awarded.

HHO2274 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 4
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
PrerequisitesHHO2173 Osteopathic Science 3; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Apply the biomechanical principles underlying the use of HVLA thrust techniques to the spine;
2. Demonstrate with commentary and perform HVLA thrust techniques to the spine safely whilst taking into consideration both patient and operator comfort;
3. Justify the principles of regional peripheral examination;
4. Demonstrate with commentary and perform examinations of the peripheral regions;
5. Explain the possible and probable therapeutic mechanisms of common osteopathic techniques;
6. Develop osteopathic case-note taking skills;
7. Discuss the traditional osteopathic principles and philosophy;
8. Evaluate traditional osteopathic concepts and theories in terms of currently-available scientific evidence;
9. Explain current scientific concepts and theories relevant to the manual therapies in general;
10. Discuss the extent of the evidence-based approach to medicine and the limited support currently available to the manual therapies;
11. Evaluate scientific and magazine articles on osteopathic principles, philosophy and practice.
Content This unit comprises four modules: Module 1: High Velocity Low Amplitude Thrust Technique; Module 2: Peripheral Joint Technique; Module 3: Osteopathic Science Theory; and Module 4: History and Principles. The content will include: further development of osteopathic manual soft tissue skills and the uses of leverage in treatment regimes. Continued refinement of treatment approaches to effect reflex and structural changes in muscle. Introduction to the use of high velocity thrust techniques applicable to the spine and periphery. Stress is placed upon observation prior to palpation and the need to recognise the anatomical relationships on one region of the body to others. Treatment techniques of the peripheral regions and refinement of peripheral examination techniques. Osteopathic principles and application pf forces to all soft tissues and joints of the body to normalise mechanics. Contraindications to the use of osteopathic techniques. Application and interpretation of tests and protocols relating to patient safety. Further exploration of the principles and practice of osteopathic medicine as distinct from allopathic and other complementary therapies. The evidence base underpinning osteopathic principles and somatic dysfunction. Introduction to the osteopathic case history, examination and tissue diagnosis. Development of the conceptual framework of osteopathy and an understanding of osteopathic history and philosophy. Current scientific and popular issues in osteopathy, including issues relevant to Australia.
Required Reading Gibbons, P., & Tehan, P. (2006). Manipulation of the spine, thorax and pelvis: An osteopathic perspective (2nd ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Bogduk, N. (2005). Clinical anatomy of the lumbar spine and sacrum. (4th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. DiGiovanna, E. L., Schiowitz, S., & Dowling, D. J. (2004). An osteopathic approach to diagnosis and treatment (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Greenman, P. E. (2003). Principles of manual medicine (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Kuchera, W. A., & Kuchera, M. L. (1992). Osteopathic principles in practice (2nd ed. rev.). Kirksville, MO: Kirksville College of Osteopathic Medicine. Lederman, E. (2005). The science and practice of manual therapy (2nd ed.). New York: Churchill Livingstone. Richardson, C. A., Jull, G. A., Hodges, P. W., & Hides, J. A. (1999). Therapeutic exercise for spinal segmental stabilization in low back pain. Scientific basis and clinical approach. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Ward, R. C. (Ed.). (2003). Foundations for osteopathic medicine (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins
Class Contact Five (5) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); one 20-minute practical examination (HVLA) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); one 15-minute practical examination (Peripheral Assessment (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); one 3-hour written examination (Osteopathic Science Theory) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); four 30-minutes quizzes (History and Principles) (pass/fail each) (hurdle requirement).

HHO2549 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 2

HHO3175 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 5
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO2173 Osteopathic Science 3; or equivalent.
Content The aim of the subject is to further develop and consolidate skills learned in HHO1171 and HHO2549 Osteopathic Science 1 and 2. To introduce concepts of osteopathic patient management. To introduce muscle energy techniques for axial and peripheral areas. At the completion of the subject students will be able to apply high velocity low amplitude thrust techniques and muscle energy techniques to all major areas of the body, and will be able to formulate a management plan for patients suffering from typical musculoskeletal conditions. This subject is a composite subject comprising two distinct core elements - 1. Osteopathic Principles & Practice. 2. Osteopathic Diagnosis & Management. These core elements will be taught and assessed as distinct subjects. Students will have to gain a mandatory pass, or better, in all core elements before they can be awarded a pass within the subject title: Osteopathic Science 3. Material covered will include: Reinforcement of history and examination skills acquired in both Osteopathic Science 1 & 2 and the Clinical Diagnosis and Management subject. Emphasis will be placed upon osteopathic evaluation of the patient concentrating upon the neuro-musculoskeletal system. Continued development of the concepts and skills acquired in osteopathic Science 1 & 2. Further evolution of osteopathic skills with awareness of the nature of the forces used; soft tissue and articulatory, rhythmic, low velocity, and high velocity low amplitude thrust techniques. Development of the ability to formulate suitable and safe treatment programs for the diverse range of patients that attend for osteopathic treatment. Attention being given to those factors which impact upon patient presentation including relevance of predisposing and maintaining factors. Continued development, and further refining, of high velocity low amplitude thrust techniques, the principles underlying their use, and their place within the manipulative prescription. The application of HVLA techniques to functional areas of the spine. Introduction and elaboration of the concepts and practice of Muscle Energy Technique to include diagnostic and Neuro physiological models. Muscle Energy Techniques applicable to the spine and peripheral joints. Osteopathic assessment and management of peripheral joint disorders. Development of a differential diagnosis, formulating a prognosis and prescribing suitable and safe osteopathic treatment. Introduction to the psycho-social aspects of osteopathic patient management allowing integration with the units of Psychology and Sociology.
Required Reading Cailliet R (1987) Soft Tissue Pain and Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Low Back Pain Syndrome F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Knee Pain and Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Neck and Arm pain F A Davis Philadelphia. Greenman P (1996) Principles of Manual Medicine 2nd ed.Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Tucker C and Deoora T K (1994) Fundamental osteopathic techniques Research Publications Pty Ltd Melbourne, Australia. Stoddard A (1983) Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London. Stoddard A (1980) Manual of Osteopathic Technique Hutchinson 3rd Ed London. DiGiovanna E and Schiowitz E (1991) An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia. Walton W J (1989) Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy. Mitchell F L (1995) The Muscle Energy Manual MET Press Michigan. Ward R C (Ed) (1997) Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for both semesters comprising lectures, tutorials/workshops and practical classes.
Assessment Semester one: Written examination, ; practical, Semester two: Written examination, practical. All components must be achieved before an overall pass can be awarded.

HHO3276 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 6
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
PrerequisitesHHO3175 Osteopathic Science 5; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Competently assess all regions of the musculoskeletal system for somatic dysfunction;
2. Explain the major contraindications to osteopathic treatment in relation to the various techniques taught;
3. Competently apply MET to any region of the musculoskeletal system;
4. Competently demonstrate with commentary and perform HVLA thrust techniques to the spine safely whilst taking into consideration both patient and operator comfort;
5. Explain HVLA of transitional regions;
6. Justify various models of osteopathic diagnosis, treatment and prognosis.
Content This unit comprises three modules: Module 1: Advanced High Velocity Low Amplitude Technique (HVLA); Module 2: Muscle Energy Technique (MET); and Module 3: Osteopathic Science Theory – common conditions. Module 1: Advanced techniques, reviewing from Osteopathic Science 3 & 4, study of the principles of HVLA thrust techniques for transitional areas and application of these techniques. Study of contraindications and safety issues in HVLA thrust techniques. Module 2: Study of the components and development of diagnosis, and estimation of prognosis in osteopathic practice. Module 3: Clinical presentations in osteopathic practice, including peripheral joint injuries and common orthopaedic complaints.
Required Reading Bogduk, N. (2005). Clinical anatomy of the lumbar spine and sacrum. (4th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Gibbons, P., & Tehan, P. (2006). Manipulation of the spine, thorax and pelvis: An osteopathic perspective (2nd ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Greenman, P. E. (2003). Principles of manual medicine (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Parsons, J., & Marcer, N. (2005). Osteopathy: Models for diagnosis, treatment and practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Chaitow, L., & Liebenson, C. (2001). Muscle energy techniques (2nd ed.). Churchill Livingstone. DiGiovanna, E. L., Schiowitz, S., & Dowling, D. J. (2004). An osteopathic approach to diagnosis and treatment (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Dummer, T. (1999). A textbook of osteopathy. UK: Jotom Publications. Isaacs, E. R., & Bookhout, M. R. (2001). Bourdillion’s slinal manipulation (6th ed.). Butterworth Heinemann. Mitchell, F. L., & Mitchell, P. K-G. (2002). Muscle energy manual (Vols. 1-3). Lansing, MI: MET Press. Mitchell, F. L., Moran, P. S., & Pruzzo, N. A. (1979). An evaluation and treatment manual of osteopathic muscle energy procedures. Valley Park, MO: Mitchell Moran & Pruzzo Associates. (out of print) Ward, R. C. (Ed.). (2003). Foundations for osteopathic medicine (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Class Contact Five (5) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); two 15-minute practical examinations (MET, and HVLA), (pass/fail each) (hurdle requirements); one 3-hour final written examination (Osteopathic Science Theory), (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement).

HHO3569 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 3

HHO4187 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 7
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisites HBOS Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Use an expanded their vocabulary in the area of pathology;
2. Explain the aetiology, pathological stages, clinical picture, complications, and diagnosis of neurological diseases affecting the CNS and PNS;
3. Discuss the basic treatments for neurological diseases affecting the CNS and PNS, and how those treatments might impact on the practising osteopath;
4. Give a brief epidemiological profile of the CNS and PNS diseases, and especially any profiles relevant to the population in Australia.
Content Introduction to indirect techniques. Strain/counterstrain techniques and introduction to functional assessment and technique. Introduction to concepts and principles of rehabilitation for specific injuries encountered in osteopathic practice. Assessment, treatment and rehabilitation of common injuries involving the ankle, calf, foot and knee. Acute and chronic injuries and principles of taping. Presentation of patient information. Case conferencing.
Required Reading Kiatos, J. (2006). HHY4285 Pathology 5 unit manual. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, Osteopathy Unit.Kumar, V., Abbas, A. K., & Fausto, N. (2004). Robbins and Cotran’s pathological basis of disease (7th ed.). Elsevier Science.
Recommended Reading Adams, J. C., & Hamblen, D. L. (1995). Outline of orthopaedics (12th ed.). Churchill Livingstone. Chandrasoma, P., & Taylor, C. R. (1997). Concise pathology (3rd ed.) McGraw-Hill Publishing Company. Stevens, A., Lowe, J. S., & Young, B. (2002). Wheater’s basic histopathology (4th ed.). Churchill Livingstone. Underwood, J. C. E. (2004). General and systematic pathology (4th ed.). Churchill Livingstone.
Class Contact Twenty-four (24) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment One 45-minute mid-semester test (20%); one 2-hour written examination (80%).

HHO4288 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 8
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisites HHO4187 Osteopathic Science 7; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Demonstrate a range of technical skills, including fascial and balanced ligamentous tension techniques;
2. Discuss aspects of patient management, including those that may impact on the management of infants, children, the elderly and the infirm;
3. Explain rehabilitation procedures for common conditions and surgical procedures affecting the spine, pelvis and thorax
Content Indirect techniques. Functional, fascial and Balanced Ligamentous Tension (BLT) techniques. Rehabilitation. Assessment, treatment and rehabilitation of injuries to the spine, pelvis and thorax. Rehabilitation after common surgical procedures to the spine, pelvis and thorax. Management of acute and chronic injuries. Presentation of patient information; case conferencing.
Required Reading Johnston, W. L., & Friedman, H. D. (1991). Functional methods. Indianapolis, IL: American Academy of Osteopathy
Recommended Reading Friedman, H. D. (2000). Myofascial and fascial ligamentous approaches in osteopathic manipulative medicine. NY: SFIMMS.Ward, R. C. (Ed.). (2003). Foundations for osteopathic medicine (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Class Contact Sixty (60) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Two (2) written assignments (2000 words each) (each 25%, total 50%); one 20-minute practical skills test (50%) (hurdle requirement).

HHO4589 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 4
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO3175 Osteopathic Science 5; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to expand the scope of students' technical and clinical skills, building on the foundations gained in the HBOS course. Additional osteopathic techniques will be taught, there will be a continuing emphasis on preventive care, including clinical ergonomics, and there will be an introduction to patient management skills. By the end of this subject the students should have further expanded their technical range, and should be aware of aspects of patient and practice management which will then be studied further in year two of the Master of Health Science - Osteopathy. Content will include: the various models of osteopathic treatment. Strain/Counterstrain and functional techniques. Clinical ergonomics for osteopaths, incl. occupational health. Problems of patient management - time management, treatment of infants, children the elderly and disabled, osteopathy and the law, medical letter and report writing, the role of osteopathy in overall healthcare management. Presentation of patient information - case conferencing.
Required Reading Jones LH 1994 Strain and Counterstrain, American Academy of Osteopathy, Colorado. Johnston WL and Friedman HD, 1991 Functional Methods, American Academy of Osteopathy, Indianapolis. Pheasant S, 1991 Ergonomics, Work and Health, Macmillan, London.
Recommended Reading D'Ambrogio KJ and Roth GB, 1997 Positional Release Therapy, Mosby, St. Louis.
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for two semesters comprising lectures, tutorials/workshops and practical sessions.
Assessment Semester one: practical examination, 30%; assignment 2000 words, 20%. Semester two, practical examination, 30%; assignment 2000 words, 20%.

HHO5189 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 9
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHO4288 Osteopathic Science 8; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Demonstrate an expanded range of technical skills, including the ability to manage common visceral conditions amenable to osteopathic treatment;
2. Demonstrate a broad range of technical skills, including the ability to manage common sports injuries affecting the limbs;
3. Discuss common modes of osteopathic practice, and the basic business skills required to run a practice.

Content Visceral osteopathy and osteopathic management of conditions with visceral involvement. Introduction to principles and concepts of rehabilitation for specific injuries encountered in osteopathic practice. Assessment, treatment and rehabilitation of common injuries involving the ankle, calf, foot and knee. Acute and chronic injuries and principles of taping. Practice management : business skills and information required for day-to-day osteopathic practice.
Required Reading Barral, J. P., & Mercier, P. (1988). Visceral manipulation. Seattle, WA: Eastland Press. Jacobs, K. (Ed.). (1999). Ergonomics for therapists. UK: Butterworth Heinemann.
Victorian WorkCover Authority. (2004). Clinical framework for the delivery of health services to injured workers. Available from WorkCover Web site, www.workcover.vic.gov.au
Wallace, M. (2001). Health care and the law. Sydney: Lawbook.
Recommended Reading Department of Veterans Affairs. (2004). HIP05 Information for chiropractors and osteopaths. Available from DVA Web site, www.dva.gov.au
Victorian Transport Commission. (2005). Guidelines for service providers. Available from Transport Accident Commission Web site, http://www.tac.vic.gov.au
Class Contact Sixty (60) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Two (2) written assignments (2000 words each) (25% each, 50% total); one 20-minute practical skills assignment (50%) (hurdle requirement).

HHO5280 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 10
CampusSt Albans, City flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHO5189 Osteopathic Science 9; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Demonstrate an expanded range of technical skills, including the ability to assess and treat cranio-sacral conditions amenable to osteopathic treatment;
2. Demonstrate a broad range of technical skills, including the ability to manage common sports injuries affecting the spine and pelvis;
3. Discuss sufficient business skills required to run a practice, including appropriate aspects of tax law and third party payer requirements.

Content Introduction to the cranio-sacral osteopathy. Series of masterclasses by guest lecturers covering various aspects of technique and practice issues. Practice Management : Business skills and information required for day-to-day osteopathic practice.
Required Reading Carreiro, J. E. (2003). An osteopathic approach to children. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Chaitow, L. (2005). Cranial manipulation: Theory and practice (2nd ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Wallace, M. (2001). Health care and the law. Sydney: Lawbook.

Recommended Reading Department of Veterans Affairs. (2004). HIP05 Information for chiropractors and osteopaths available from DVA website, www.dva.gov.au
DiGiovanna, E. L., Schiowitz, S., & Dowling, D. J. (2004). An osteopathic approach to diagnosis and treatment (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Greenman, P. E. (2003). Principles of manual medicine (3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Victorian Transport Commission. (2005). Guidelines for service providers available from Transport Accident Commission Web site, http://www.tac.vic.gov.au
Victorian WorkCover Authority. (2004). Clinical framework for the delivery of health services to injured workers available from WorkCover Web site, www.workcover.vic.gov.au
Wilson, A. (2002). Effective management of musculoskeletal injury: A clinical ergonomics approach to prevention. Churchill Livingstone.
Class Contact Eight-four (84) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and practical classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment One written assignment (2000 words) (50%); one 20-minute practical skills examination (50%) (hurdle requirement).

HHO5501 OSTEOPATHIC HISTORY & PRINCIPLES 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject aims to introduce students to the historical origins and development of osteopathy as a therapy, to its theoretical principles and the research basis for osteopathic theory, and to the concepts underlying osteopathic diagnosis and therapeutic approaches. At the conclusion of the subject students should have an understanding of osteopathic history and theory, and should have developed an understanding of the principles of osteopathic diagnosis and osteopathic therapeutics. Content will include: Terminology. Historical development of osteopathic medicine as a primary health care field. Philosophy of osteopathic health care to include examination of osteopathic principles both theoretical and those that have some evidence based upon research. Development of the conceptual framework for osteopathic practice. Consideration of the functioning of the individual as a whole. ART Asymmetry, Range of motion, Tissue texture change and the application of this principle to patient care. The historical context and development of the 'osteopathic lesion' and its implication to osteopathic practice and health. Somatic dysfunction, its diagnosis including barrier principles. Somatic dysfunction and its relationship to disease causation/treatment. Deviations of health or 'wellness' into metabolic, hormonal, neural, enzymatic, psychological etc disturbances and the osteopathic treatment approach to each. Integration of the osteopathic treatment prescription. Contraindications to osteopathic care both absolute and relative.
Required Reading Basmajian JV & Nyberg R Editors 1993 Rational Manual Therapies. Baltimore Williams and Wilkins. Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Baltimore Williams and Wilkins. Kuchera M 1994 Osteopathic Considerations in Systemic Dysfunction Greyden Press OH. Ward RC Editor 1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Hoag J M 1969 Osteopathic Medicine McGraw-Hill New York. Korr I M 1969 The Physiological Basis of Osteopathic Medicine Post-graduate Institute of Osteopathic Medicine New York. Korr I M 1978 Ed. The Neurological Mechanisms of Manipulative Therapy Plenum Press New York and London. Neumann H D 1989 Introduction to Manual Medicine Springer-Verlag Berlin. Willard F H & Patterson M M Ed. 1994 Nociception and the Neuroendocrine-Immune Connection American Academy of Osteopathy Athens Ohio. Selected articles from the Journal of the American Osteopathic Association and other osteopathic journals.
Subject Hours 10 hours per residential unit for two residential programs, comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops
Assessment 3000 word assignment, 30%; written examination, 70%.

HHO5502 OSTEOPATHIC HISTORY & PRINCIPLES 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1, HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to consolidate and further develop knowledge acquired in the subject HHO5501 Osteopathic History and Principles 1. It will explore the theoretical and research basis of osteopathy, consider the various 'models' of osteopathic treatment, and explore the role that osteopathic considerations may play in systemic dysfunction. The role of Registration Boards, professional associations and their codes of conduct will also be discussed. By the end of this subject the students should have a thorough understanding of the theoretical basis of osteopathy, have a grasp of the various models of osteopathic treatment, and be developing an understanding of how osteopathic techniques and approaches may be used in the management of systemic conditions. They will also understand the roles of the Registration Boards and professional associations and their codes of conduct. Content will include: The neurophysiological mechanisms underpinning osteopathic principles and practice. Further exploration of the different 'models' used by osteopaths to formulate a diagnosis and prescribe osteopathic treatment. The historical development of these 'models' and review of research that may or may not validate practice: Parasympathetic and sympathetic control, Zink patterns, Chapman's reflexes, Lymphatic techniques, Visceral osteopathy, Cranial osteopathy. Osteopathic considerations in systemic dysfunction. The responsibilities of practitioners in professional practice. The norms of conduct expected by the Registration Boards and by colleagues in the Osteopathic and allied professions. Professional societies. Code of Ethics. Advertising restrictions.
Required Reading Greenma 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Kuchera M 1994 Osteopathic Considerations in Systemic Dysfunction Greyden Press OH. Ward RC Editor 1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Hoag J M 1969 Osteopathic Medicine McGraw-Hill New York. Korr I M 1969 The Physiological Basis of Osteopathic Medicine Post-graduate Institute of Osteopathic Medicine New York. Neumann H D 1989 Introduction to Manual Medicine Springer-Verlag Berlin. Selected articles from the JAOA.
Subject Hours 10 hours per residential unit one residential unit comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment 3000 word assignment, 30%; written examination, 70%.

HHO5509 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 5
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO4589 Osteopathic Science 4; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to complete the teaching of osteopathic techniques; to further emphasise preventive care via exercise prescription, and to teach the students the business and administrative skills required to run a practice. By the end of this subject the students should be competent in a broad range of osteopathic techniques, and should be able to advise patients on a broad range of preventive healthcare options. They should have the business and administrative skills necessary to open and run their own practices. content will include: Reinforcement of ethical and interprofessional issues. Visceral osteopathy. Cranio-sacral osteopathy. Advanced osteopathic technique - refinement and further development of techniques. Practice management - how to set up and operate a practice, incl. accounting and tax planning. Exercise prescription for specific purposes and conditions. Orthopaedic surgical procedures and their implications for osteopaths. The osteopath in practice - public health issues, the healthcare system and the place of osteopathy, government health policy and the economic imperative in healthcare.
Required Reading Barral, JP and Mercier P 1988 Visceral Manipulation, Eastland Press, Seattle. Sutherland, W.G., Teachings in the Science of Osteopathy, A. Wales ed., Rudra Press, NY. Magoun, H.I. 1976, Osteopathy in the Cranial Field, Journal Printing Co., Kirksville.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanni, E. and Schiowitz, S., An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment, J.P. Lippincott, Phil. Sutherland, W.G., With Thinking Fingers, The Cranial Academy Printing Co., Kirksville Mo. Retzlaff, E.W. and Mitchell, F.L., 1990 The Cranium and Its Sutures, Springer-Verlag, Germany.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for two semesters comprising lectures, practicals and workshops.
Assessment Semester one: practical examinations, 40%; Semester two: practical examinations, 40%; assignment 2000 words, 20%.

HHO5511 OSTEOPATHIC TECHNIQUE 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject aims to introduce students to basic osteopathic techniques for both soft tissues and articular structures, including articulatory, muscle energy and high velocity, low-amplitude thrust techniques, and to develop the palpatory skills needed fort heir successful application. On completion of the subject the students should be able to locate and assess dysfunctional tissues, and should be able to apply the techniques taught to most areas of the musculoskeletal system. They should also be aware of contraindications to the use of these techniques. content will include: Technique will include the development of high level palpatory skills to facilitate an awareness of the characteristics of both normal and dysfunctional tissues. Spinal segmental palpatory examination. Basic soft tissue techniques applicable to the musculoskeletal system. The use of long and short leverages to induce motion within the musculoskeletal system. Articulatory techniques as applicable to: Appendicular skeleton, Cervical spine, Thoracic spine, Lumbar spine, Pelvis. High Velocity Low Amplitude HVLA thrust techniques for the appendicular skeleton and non-junctional areas of the spinal column. Introduction to Muscle Energy Techniques MET - principles and application to all soft tissues and joints of the body to normalise mechanics. Absolute and relative contraindications to the use of these techniques.
Required Reading Beal M C Ed 1989 The Principles of Palpatory Diagnosis and Manipulative Technique American Academy of Osteopathy Newark Ohio. Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Baltimore Williams and Wilkins. Hartman L 1997 Handbook of Osteopathic Technique 3rd Ed. London Chapman & Hall. Mitchell F L 1995 The Muscle Energy Manual. Vol 1. MET Press East Lansing, Michigan. Ward RC Editor 1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Baltimore Williams and Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991 An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia. Fryette H H 1954 Principles of Osteopathic Technic Academy of Applied Osteopathy Carmel California. Graham K E Outline of Muscle Energy Techniques Okalahoma College of Osteopathic Medicine and Surgery. Mitchell F L, Moran P S and Pruzzo N A 1979 An Evaluation and Treatment Manual of Osteopathic Muscle Energy Procedures Valley Park Mo 63088 Mitchell, Moran and Pruzzo Associates. Stoddard A 1980 Manual of Osteopathic Technique Hutchinson 3rd Ed London. Walton W J 1989 Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy. Wernham G and Waldman M An Illustrated Manual of Osteopathic Technique Maidstone Osteopathic Clinic.
Subject Hours 50 hours for residential unit 1 and residential unit 2, comprising lectures, practical labs and workshops. Optional elective component: This elective must be eligible for the award of continuing medical education CME credits from statutory osteopathic accrediting agencies and be agreed by the course co-ordinator. Exemption will be for attendance hours only. Students will be expected to successfully complete all examinations.
Assessment Practical & viva voce examinations, 100%.

HHO5512 OSTEOPATHIC TECHNIQUE 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1, HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to expand the range of osteopathic manual techniques that the students can use, and will include additional high velocity, low amplitude thrust techniques for junctional areas, plus introduction to osteopathic indirect techniques, and the cautions and contraindications for these. By the completion of this subject, the students will have a basic grounding in all of the commonly used osteopathic techniques, and will have an awareness of their appropriate application and the contraindications to their use. Content will include: Further development of osteopathic palpatory skills with awareness of the nature of the forces used; analysis of skills into categories of rhythmic, low velocity stress and thrust techniques. Development of the ability to formulate a suitable treatment program for a variety of patients and clinical conditions considering age, occupation, life style etc. Further development of osteopathic skills and the use of leverages in osteopathic treatment regimes. High Velocity Low Amplitude HVLA thrust techniques to the junctional areas of the spinal column. To include: Atlanto-occipital joint, Atlanto-axial joint, Cervico-dorsal junction, Dorso-lumbar junction, Lumbo-sacral articulation. HVLA thrust techniques to the ribs and pelvis. Continued development of skills in the application of soft tissue, articulation and muscle energy techniques. Introduction to the following technical approaches: Fascial release, Neuromuscular technique/inhibition, Functional technique, Strain/counterstrain, Visceral osteopathy, Cranio-sacral techniques. Common and less common clinical presentations - the various osteopathic treatment approaches to these.
Required Reading Barral J P and Mercier P 1988-1989 Visceral Manipulation Vols 1 and 2 Eastland Press Seattle. Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Hartman L 1997 Handbook of Osteopathic Technique 3rd Ed. Chapman & Hall London. Kendall F and McCreary E 1983 Muscles, Testing and Function Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Owens C 1963The Endocrine Interpretation of Chapman's Reflexes Academy for Applied Osteopathy Carmel California.
Recommended Reading Chaitow L 1988 Soft Tissue Manipulation Thorsons Publishing Group Wellingborough. Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991 An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia. Janda V 1983 Muscle Function Testing Butterworth London. Jones L Strain and Counterstain American Academy of Osteopathy. Lewit K 1985 Manipulative Therapy in Rehabilitation of the Motor System Butterworths London. Magoun H I 1976 Osteopathy in the Cranial Field Journal Printing Co Kirksville. Retzlaff E W and Mitchell F L The Cranium and its Sutures Springer-Verlag. Stoddard A 1980 Manual of Osteopathic Technique Hutchinson 3rd Ed London. Stoddard A 1983 Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson London. Sutherland W G Teachings in the Science of Osteopathy Ed by Wales A Rudra Press. Sutherland W G The Cranial Bowl Mankato Free Press Co. Sutherland W G Contributions of Thought USA Collected by the Cranial Academy. Sutherland W G With Thinking Fingers Kirksville Mo The Cranial Academy Printing Co. Travell J and Simons D Myofascial Pain and Dysfunction - The Trigger Point Manual Vol 1 Butterworths Baltimore. Tucker C The Mechanics of Sports Injuries Blackwell Scientific Publications Oxford. Walton W J 1989 Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy.
Subject Hours 50 hours per residential unit one residential unit comprising lectures, workshops and practical labs.
Assessment Practical & viva voce examination, 100%.

HHO5521 OSTEOPATHIC DIAGNOSIS 1
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject aims to teach students the skills required to take an osteopathic case history and carry out a full osteopathic physical examination. By the conclusion, the students should be able to take a full osteopathically-oriented case history and carry out an osteopathic physical examination using observation, palpation and motion testing. Content will include: The osteopathic case history. Emphasis will be placed upon the role of predisposing, precipitating and maintaining factors in the development of an osteopathic diagnosis and prognosis. The importance of observation of the patient prior to palpatory examination will be stressed. Special attention will be placed upon: Erect and sitting posture, Gait, Occupational and environmental stresses. Recognition of contraindications to the use of osteopathic techniques from the history, examination, and special investigations. The importance of segmental spinal examination in the formulation of a mechanical/motion diagnosis. Osteopathic considerations in systemic dysfunction.
Required Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991 An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia. Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Stoddard A 1983 Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London. Ward RC Editor 1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Baltimore Williams and Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Cailliet R 1987 Soft Tissue Pain and Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R 1987 Low Back Pain Syndrome F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R 1987 Knee Pain and Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R 1987 Neck and Arm Pain F A Davis Philadelphia. Walton W J 1989 Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy.
Subject Hours 15 hours for residential unit 1 and residential unit two comprising lectures, workshops and practical labs.
Assessment Practical examinations, 50%; assignments, 50%.

HHO5522 OSTEOPATHIC DIAGNOSIS 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1, HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to consolidate and further develop knowledge acquired in the subject HHO5521 Osteopathic Diagnosis 1. Consideration will be given to causes of orthopaedic and osteopathic dysfunction, to the formulation of osteopathic differential diagnoses, and to the formulation of a comprehensive osteopathic treatment plan. The students will be able, at the end of the subject, to carry out full orthopaedic and osteopathic assessment of patients, to formulate osteopathic differential diagnoses, and to devise a treatment plan suitable for individual patients, taking all safety aspects into consideration. Content will include: Evaluation of musculoskeletal system dysfunctions. Osteopathic differential diagnosis. Formulation of structured and sequenced treatment prescriptions arising from osteopathic diagnosis. Detection of somatic dysfunction. Abnormalities of spinal mechanics: congenital, acquired and developmental. Osteopathic considerations in systemic dysfunction. Review of literature and manipulative therapy critique.
Required Reading Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Stoddard A 1983 Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London. Ward RC Editor 1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991 An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia. Walton W J 1989 Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy.
Subject Hours 15 hours per residential unit for both residential programs comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment Practical examination, 50%; assignment, 50%.

HHP1171 PHYSIOLOGY 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject includes the introduction to the principles and concepts of basic human physiological methodology. Major concepts involved: homeostasis, cellular physiology, blood and the body's natural defences, introduction to the nervous system, membrane and action potentials, transmission of nervous impulses, muscle and skeletal physiology. The theoretical physiological knowledge is integrated with laboratory skills enhancing and extending knowledge through the use of laboratory reports and questions. Development of critical thinking, research skills and writing is undertaken throughout the subject.
Required Reading Berne, R.M., Levy, M.N., Koeppen, B.M. & Stanton, B.A. (2004) Physiology. 4th Edition. Mosby-Year Book, St. Louis, USA. Or Guyton, A.C. and Hall, J.E. (2000) Textbook of Medical Physiology. 10th Edition. Saunders, Philadelphia, USA.
Recommended Reading Best, C.H. & Taylor, N.B. (1991) Physiological Basis of Medical Practice. 12th Edition. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, USA. Ganong, W.F. (2001) Review of Medical Physiology. 20th Edition. Appleton & Lange, Connecticut, USA. Guyton, A.C. & Hall, J.E. (2000) Pocket Companion to the Textbook of Medical Physiology. 10th Edition. Saunders, Philadelphia, USA.
Rhoades, R. & Pflanzer, R. (1996) Human Physiology. 3rd Edition. Saunders, Philadelphia, USA. Vander, A.J., Sherman, J.H. & Luciano, D.S. (2004) Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body Function. 9th Edition. McGraw-Hill Book Company, USA
Subject Hours Two one-hour lectures per week and one two-hour laboratory/workshop on alternate weeks for one semester.
Assessment Semester 2: End of semester exam, 50%; laboratory reports, 15%; multiple choice mid semester exams (x2), 20%; assignment (2000 words), 15%. All components must be passed to achieve an overall pass in the subject.

HHP1329 PHYSIOLOGY 1

HHP2172 PHYSIOLOGY 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHP1171 Physiology 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to consolidate and further develop knowledge gained in HHP1171 Physiology 1. To study the physiology of systems not covered in Physiology 1, and to develop a review process for physiology research papers. At the completion of the subject students should have a thorough understanding of the basic physiology of the major systems, and should be able to demonstrate a critical approach to physiological research. content will include: Expansion of the fundamental principles and concepts covered in Physiology 1. The relation of theoretical physiology knowledge to clinical cases. Understanding the major physiological concepts involved in respiratory physiology, gastro-intestinal physiology, metabolism and endocrinology. Further development of a critical thinking and assessment model for physiology research papers.
Required Reading As for HHP1171 Physiology 1.
Recommended Reading As for HHP1171 Physiology 1.
Subject Hours One two-hour lecture, one one-hour laboratory workshop/tutorial or equivalent every week for two semesters.
Assessment Semester One: End of semester exam, 25%; case study tutorial work, 10%; assignment, 10%; multiple choice mid semester exam (x2), 10%. Semester 2: End of semester exam, 25%; case study tutorial work, 10%; multiple choice mid semester exam (x2), 10%.

HHP2273 PHYSIOLOGY 3
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
PrerequisitesHHP2172 Physiology 2; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes 1. Discuss the key principles and concepts of human physiology in relation to respiratory and gastrointestinal physiology;
2. Explain the major concepts involved in respiratory and gastrointestinal physiology;
3. Integrate theoretical knowledge on respiratory and gastrointestinal physiology with clinical cases;
4. Apply scientific questioning to basic theoretical knowledge of respiratory and gastrointestinal physiology;
5. Critically assess research and clinical report papers, and respiratory and gastrointestinal physiology papers in
6. Produce clinical case reports and written critiques on topics in respiratory and gastrointestinal physiology in a conventional scientific format.
Content This unit extends the principles and concepts of basic human physiology. Aspects of cellular and systems physiology are explained in the contexts of respiratory and gastrointestinal physiology. Critical thinking in human physiology is extended through the use of clinical case studies and the clinical case report. Material is specifically related to clinically relevant presentations in osteopathic practice.
Required Reading Guyton, A. C., & Hall, J. E. (2006). Textbook of medical physiology (11th ed.). Philadelphia: Elsevier Science.
Recommended Reading Berne, R. M., Levy, M. N., Koeppen, B. M., & Stanton, B. A. (2004). Physiology (5th ed.). St. Louis, MO: Mosby-Year Book. Ganong, W. F. (2001). Review of medical physiology (20th ed.). Connecticut, NE: Appleton & Lange. Guyton, A. C., & Hall, J. E. (2000). Pocket companion to the textbook of medical physiology (10th ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders. Vander, A. J., Sherman, J. H., & Luciano, D. S. (2000). Human physiology: The mechanisms of body function (8th ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Class Contact Three (3) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and laboratory classes. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); one oral presentation of a case study (15%); written assignment (1500 words) (15%); two 1-hour multiple choice question (MCQ) tests (10% each, total 20%); one 3-hour written examination (50%).

HHP2349 PHYSIOLOGY 2

HHP3174 PHYSIOLOGY 4
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHP2172 Physiology 2; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to introduce the students to theoretical and practical concepts of exercise physiology and exercise prescription, and to consider exercise prescription for specific patient groups. At the completion of the subject students should have a broad understanding of the principles of exercise physiology and exercise prescription, and should understand the principles of drawing up exercise prescriptions for specific patient groups. content will include: Physiology of exercise prescription. Principles of exercise prescription Fitness definitions. Cardiovascular & skeletal responses to exercise. Aerobic and anaerobic exercise. Exercise prescription for specific groups.
Required Reading As for HHP2172 Physiology 2.
Recommended Reading Students will be provided with further reading references for individual lecture topics.
Subject Hours One one-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial practical per week in semester one.
Assessment Written examination, 80% assignment 20%

HHP3275 PHYSIOLOGY 5
CampusSt Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
PrerequisitesHHP3174 Physiology 4; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to: 1. Define the theoretical and practical concepts in exercise physiology and exercise prescription;
2. Discuss the principles of exercise physiology and exercise prescription;
3. Discuss the principles of prescribing exercise to special populations;
4. Explain exercise prescription for specific patient groups;
5. Discuss issues associated with acute sporting injuries;
6. Develop and write exercise programs;
7. Show familiarity with some sports medicine techniques.
Content The introduction of the concepts and principles of exercise physiological and the methodology of exercise prescription in normal and special populations. Topics include cardiovascular and muscular responses and adaptations to exercise; exercise prescription principles, exercise prescription for normal and patient populations, principles of stretching and strengthening exercises. Clinical case studies relevant to osteopathic practice are used to extend critical thinking throughout this unit.
Required Reading Malone, T. R., McPoil, T., & Nitz, A. J. (1997). Orthopedic and sports physical therapy (3rd ed.). St. Louis, MO: Mosby.McArdle, W. D., Katch, F. I., & Katch, V. L. (2001). Exercise physiology. Energy, nutrition and human performance (5th ed.). USA: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins
Recommended Reading American College of Sports Medicine. (2000). Guidelines for exercise testing and prescription (6th ed.). Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Åstrand, P.-O., & Rodahl, K. (1986). Textbook of work physiology. Physiological basis of exercise (3rd ed.). USA: McGraw-Hill. Brooks, G. A., Fahey, T. D., White, T. P., & Baldwin, K. M. (2000). Exercise physiology. Human bioenergetics and its applications (3rd ed.). California: Mayfield. Irwin, S., & Tecklin, J. S. (1997). Cardiopulmonary physical therapy (3rd ed.). St. Louis, MO: Mosby. Shankar, K. (1999). Exercise prescription. Philadelphia: Hanley & Belfus Inc. Skinner, J. S. (1992). Exercise testing and exercise prescription for special cases. Theoretical Basis and Clinical Application (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger. Umphred, D. A. (1997). Neurological rehabilitation (3rd ed.). St. Louis, MO: Mosby. Zuluaga, M., Briggs, C., Carlisle, J. et al. (Eds.). (1995). Sports physiotherapy. Applied science and practice. Melbourne, Australia: Churchill Livingstone.
Class Contact Two (2) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions. Practical sessions have a hurdle requirement of at least 90% attendance.
Assessment Participation in practical sessions with at least 90% attendance unless well-documented acceptable reasons are provided (hurdle requirement); one written assignment (2000 words) (20%); one 15-minute combined oral and practical examination (30%); one 2-hour final written examination (50%).

HHP3369 PHYSIOLOGY 3

HHR0001 INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS
CampusFootscray Park, St Albans, City Flinders Lane
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of this subject will provide an introduction to research methods and design for the social sciences. This will include a review of the scientific methods and ways of knowing, quantitative and qualitative paradigms, questionnaire design and evaluation, validity and reliability of research designs, ethical issues and evaluation of the research design of published papers. The subject will also include an introduction to sampling and methods of data collection and analysis for quantitative and qualitative research. The study of quantitative methods will focus on experimental, correlational and survey designs and of the corresponding methods of data analyses including descriptive and inferential statistics, correlation and regression and hypothesis testing. The qualitative research designs to be studied in some detail will be drawn from case study, ethnography, grounded theory, phenomenology, historical research, philosophical research and action research. The role of the researcher in collecting qualitative data will be discussed along with methods of analysing qualitative data.
Recommended Reading Baumgartner, T.A. & Strong, C.H. (1994). Conducting and Reading Research in Health and Human Performance. Dubuque, IA: Wm. C. Brown Communications, Inc. Bell, J. (1993). Doing Your Research Project. (2nd Ed.) Birmingham: Open University Press. Burns, N. & Grove, S. (1997). The Practice of Nursing Research: Conduct, Critique and Utilization (3rd Ed.). Sydney: Saunders. Maxwell, J. A. (1996). Qualitative Research Design. Thousand Oaks: Sage. Munro, B. H. (1997). Statistical Methods for Health Care Research (3rd Ed.). USA: Lippincott. National Health and Medical Research Council (1999). National Statement on Ethical Conduct in Research Involving Humans. Canberra: Commonwealth Government. Thomas, J.R. & Nelson, J.K. (1996) Research Methods in Physical Activity (3rd edition) Champaign, Ill.: Human Kinetics. Victoria University. (2000). Handbook of Candidature Research Proposals. Victoria University. Wiersma, W. (2000). Research Methods in Education: An Introduction (7th Ed.). Needham Heights, Ma.: Allyn and Bacon.
Subject Hours Two hour seminar and one hour tutorial per week for one semester.
Assessment A research proposal, and/or approved assignments related to research literature and processes in professional practice (3000 words for Graduate Diploma students; 5000 words for Masters, PhD students) 100%.

HHS3019 PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 1

HHS3171 PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject aims to introduce students to the different psychological and sociological aspects of healthcare practice. Students study gender, age, ethnicity and socio-economics status and the relevance in healthcare practice. Students examine the needs of individuals with a terminal illness and their carers, and the potential role of the Osteopath. Students develop communication and interviewing skills relevant to Osteopathic practice. Students learn to understand the effects of stress on the patient as well as the healthcare practitioner and how this may be addressed. Students study health compromising behaviours and appropriate intervention as well gain an understanding of psychological issues relating to human development.
Required ReadingFrench, Sally (1998) Physiotherapy, A Psychosocial Approach 2nd ed. Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford. Allen Felicity (1998) Health Psychology Theory and Practice, Allen and Unwin, Australia.
Recommended Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Subject Hours One, One hour lecture per week for the first semester. One, one hour tutorial per week for the second semester.
Assessment Assignment 70%, written exam 30%.

HHS3272 PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 2
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus.
Prerequisites HHS3171 Psychology & Social Sciences 1; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to: 1. Discuss psychological and sociological issues relevant to healthcare practice;
2. Explain the needs of patients from different communities; 3. Use effective communication and interviewing skills relevant to osteopathic practice;
4. Predict the effects of stress on patients;
5. Propose strategies to minimize the effects of stress on patients;
6. Discuss the issues associated with suicide and euthanasia;
7. Explain the effects of and interventions for health-compromising behaviours;
8. Justify and promote health-enhancing behaviours for the individual and the group.
Content Psychological and sociological aspects of healthcare practice. The needs of patients in the community. Relevance of gender, age, ethnicity and socio-economics status in healthcare practice. Communications skills required in healthcare practice. Health enhancing and health compromising behaviors. Challenging situations, such as stress, suicide and euthanasia, in healthcare practice.
Required Reading French, S. (1998). Physiotherapy: A psychosocial approach (2nd ed.). Oxford: Butterworth Heinemann.
Recommended Reading Allen, F. (1998). Health psychology Theory and practice. Australia: Allen and Unwin. Caltabiano, M. L., & Sarafino, E. P. (2002). Health psychology. Biopsychosocial interactions. An Australian perspective. Australia: John Wiley & Sons Australia, Ltd. Taylor, S. (1999). Health psychology (4th ed.). USA: McGraw-Hill. Victorian Smoking and Health Program (Producer). (1997). Quit because you can.
Class Contact Two (2) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Patient interviews and presentation (30%); one exercise program (30%); one 2-hour end-of-semester written examination (40%).

HHS4039 PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCE 2
CampusCity Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHS3171 Psychology and Social Sciences 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to develop the interpersonal skills required of a practitioner in practice, and to develop an understanding of the psychology of pain and how pain may be managed as well as introduction to psychopathology. By the end of the subject the student should have a broad understanding of the factors affecting successful communication with a patient, and the psychology of pain and pain management as well as an understanding of psychopathology. Content will include: Communication skills - attending and listening, feedback, empathy, probing, identifying and clarifying problems, ethics. Psychology of pain and pain management - pain theories and measurement, psychosocial factors, placebos and expectations, description and categories of pain, managing acute and chronic pain, multicomponent pain treatment.
Required Reading Communication skills , the psychology of pain and psychopathology cover widely differing areas of psychology and are not adequately covered by single texts. A range of book and journal article references will therefore be supplied as appropriate for each topic, and students are in addition encouraged to read widely on the subject.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for two semesters comprising lectures and tutorials/workshops.
Assessment Assignments Semester One: Assignment (videotape) 50%. Semester Two: written exam 25%, written report 25%
HHT1127 MINOR THESIS (full-time)
HHT1137 MINOR THESIS (full-time)
HHT1147 MINOR THESIS (part-time)

HHS4183 PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCE 3
Campus St Albans, City flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisites HBOS Bachelor of Science - Clinical Sciences; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, it is expected that students will be able to:
1. Apply the basic skills that are necessary for effective interpersonal communication in a therapeutic relationship
2. Predict the effects that psychological variables may have on pain symptomatology and pain management;
3. Recognize behaviours and symptoms that are consistent with psychopathology;
4. Describe strategies useful to the osteopath in the management of key psychopathologies.
Content Interpersonal communication skills: attending and listening, feedback, empathy, probing, identifying and clarifying problems, ethics. Psychology of pain and pain management. Pain theories and measurement, psychosocial factors, placebos and expectations, descriptions and categories of pain, managing acute and chronic pain. Psychopathology, presentation, recognition, diagnosis, and an overview of the management of psychopathology.
Required Reading Carr, D. B., Loeser, J. D., & Morris, D. B. (Eds.). (2005). Narrative pain and suffering. Seattle, WA: IASP Press. Corey, G. (1996). Theory and practice of counseling and psychotherapy (5th ed.). California: Brooks/Cole. Oltmans, T. F., & Emery, R. E. (1998). Abnormal psychology (4th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice Hall. School of Health Sciences. (2006). HHS4183 Psychology & Social Sciences 3 evidence-based practice chronic pain assignment book of readings. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, Osteopathy Unit. School of Health Sciences. (2006). HHS4183 Psychology & Social Sciences 3 workbook and tutorial book of readings. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, Osteopathy Unit.
Recommended Reading Brettle, A., Grant, M. J., & Booth, A. (2004). Finding the evidence from practice. London: Churchill Livingstone. Jones, M. A., & Rivett, D. A. (2004). Clinical reasoning for manual therapists. Edinburgh: Butterworth Heinemann. Kolt, G., & Andersen, M. B. (Eds.). (2004). Psychology in the physical and manual therapies. Edinburgh: Elsevier.
Class Contact Twenty-four (24) hours or equivalent normally spread over one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment Workshop presentation (20%) (hurdle requirement); one written assignment (1500 words) (30%) (hurdle requirement); one 3-hour written examination (50%) (hurdle requirement).

HHT1000 MAJOR CLASSICS - NEI JING
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Specific attention will be directed to such ideas as yin-yang; wu xing; the heaven, earth and humanity principle; the nature and meaning of Shen; the different ways of specifying and locating Qi in the body and external world; the notion of body-mind; the cultivation of life (Qi) and the idea of the good practitioner. The exploration of Nei Jing ideas is linked to major philosophical concepts, which inform the theory and practice of CM.
Required Reading Ni, M.-S. (1995). The Yellow Emperor's classic of medicine. Boston: Shambala Publication. Wu, J.-N. (1993). Ling Shu or the spiritual pivot. Washington, DC: The Taoist Center.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written project comprising two parts (2000 words) (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%.

HHT1001 INTRODUCTION TO CHINESE MEDICAL LITERACY
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Basic terms in Chinese medicine including: names of commonly used herbs; names of common acupuncture points and general terminology used in Chinese Medicine theory; writing Chinese characters including: stroke order and balance; pin yin transliteration and use of tone marks; pronunciation of Chinese terms; introduction to Chinese medical dialogue.
Required Reading Xu, H., & Xu, Y. (1999). Chinese medical literacy (Vols. 1 & 2). Melbourne: Victoria University of Technology, School of Health Sciences. Xu, H., & Xu, Y. (2003). Introduction to Chinese medical literacy. Melbourne: Victoria University of Technology, School of Health Science.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One oral examination (20%); two written examinations. To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Where the final examinations are failed, supplementary examinations will be offered. The maximum possible mark on any supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHT1002 FUNDAMENTALS OF CHINESE MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The clinical gaze of Chinese medicine; overview of historical and philosophical context; function and dysfunction according to Chinese Medicine; introductory illness states - Yin Yang, Wu Xing, Qi, Xue, Jin Ye, Ba Gang; psyche according to Chinese medicine; causes and occurrences of disease; Zang Fu organ system, Curious Fu; introduction to diagnostic methods; Zang fu/jing luo interrelationships; mechanisms of disease development; basic herbal properties, functions and theories: Si Qi, Wu Wei, four directions, courier herbs, classification, compatibility, cautions, contraindication, quality, harvesting.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1989). The foundations of Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone
Recommended Reading Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E. (2004). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd ed.). Seattle: Eastland Press. Geng, J., Juang, W., Ren, T., & Ma, X. (1991). Practical traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology: Herbal formulas. Beijing: New World Press. Hicks, A., Hicks, J., & Mole, P. (2004). Five element constitutional acupuncture. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Huang, Y.-R. (1995). Advanced textbook of traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 11, Book 1). Beijing: New World Press. Kaptchuk, T. (2000). Chinese medicine: The web that has no weaver (Rev. ed.). London: Rider. Seifert, G. (1983). The cause of disease and the classification of symptoms patterns in Chinese medicine. Sydney: Author. State Administration of TCM. (1995). Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 1). Beijing: New World Press. Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1996). Fundamentals of Chinese medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Yin, H.-H., & Shuai, X.-Z. (Eds.). (1991). Fundamentals of traditional Chinese medicine. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press. Zhang, E.-Q. (Ed.). (1988). The Chinese Materia Medica. Shanghai: Publishing House of Shanghai University of Traditional Chinese Medicine.
Subject Hours Eleven (11) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops. Four hours per week dedicated to herbs. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One assignment (1200 words) (30%); one combined practical and oral examination (10%) (hurdle requirement); two final theory examinations (30% each part, total 60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment and combined practical and oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT1005 CHINESE MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND PATHOGENESIS 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Nil.
Content The 'four examinations'; the eight principles of diagnosis; additional Oriental diagnostic methods e.g., hara diagnosis; the aetiology and manifestation of the energetic patterns of disharmony as they pertain to the jing luo, wu xing, zang fu and fundamental substances; etiology and pathomechanisms of symptom presentations; methods of differential diagnosis; overview of febrile disease differentiation - six channels, four levels, San Jiao syndromes; case histories and individual symptom differentiation; Materia Medica and Jing-luo system consolidated in relation to diagnostic treatment design.
Required Reading Deng, T.-T. (1999). Practical diagnosis in traditional Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Lu Yubin. (1996). Pulse diagnosis. Jian: China Shandong Science & Technology Press. Maciocia, G. (2004). Diagnosis in Chinese medicine: A comprehensive guide. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and self managed learning activities.
Assessment One combined practical and oral examination (50%) (hurdle requirement); one final examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (combined practical and oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted combined practical and oral examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHT1006 ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATION
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or equivalent.
Content Introduction to Jing-luo theory and an overview of acupuncture point function and dynamics; proportional measurements; gross surface anatomy as it pertains to the location of acupuncture points; the location of acupuncture points on the 12 primary meridians, Ren Mai and Du Mai; contraindications of specific acupuncture points; depths of needling of acupuncture points.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of acupuncture points. Koln: Konemann. State Administration of TCM China. (1990). The location of acupuncture points. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Seven hours per week for one semester comprising lectures, workshops and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One oral examination (50%) (hurdle requirement); one practical examination (50%) (hurdle requirement). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (oral examination and practical examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHT1007 CHINESE PHARMACOPEIA
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Introduction and overview of the historical development of Chinese herbal medicine; the categories of the Chinese Materia Medica; major herb theories, precautions, naming of herbs: regions, colours, plant parts, names and alternatives; the categories of the Materia Medica (e.g., release exterior, clear heat, drain downward, drain dampness, expel wind-damp, transform phlegm and stop cough, aromatically transform dampness, relieve food stagnation regulate Qi, regulate Xue, warm interior and expel cold, tonifying, restrain essence, Shen calming, orifice opening, extinguish wind and stop tremors, expel parasites); external applications; character writing and pronunciation of Chinese medical terminology will be extended. The characters for the names of the herbs will be emphasized along with the Latin binomial (botanical) and common names of the herbs. The principles and application of Pao Zhi.
Required Reading Bensky, D., Gamble, A., & Kaptchuk, T. J. (1993). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (Rev. ed.). Seattle: Eastland Press. Coop, P., & Hoang, P. (1997). Character writing manual and index for Chinese Materia Medica. Melbourne: Victoria University of Technology, Department of Health Sciences. Siefert, G. (Ed.). (1996). Understanding Chinese herbs, medical substances. Sydney: Siefert. Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Xu, H., & Xu, Y. (2003). Introduction to Chinese medical literacy. Melbourne: Victoria University of Technology, School of Health Science.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One project (50%); one tutorial presentation (30%); one examination (20%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (project) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHT1009 INTRO TO CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACT
Campus St Albans, Flinders Lane, Off Campus
Prerequisites HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or equivalent.
Co-requisites RBM1910 Microbiology for Chinese Medicine Practitioners; or equivalent.
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to: 1. Demonstrate skills as a beginning assistant in the clinical context;
2. Work as part of a team in clinic;
3. Demonstrate reception skills, including managing clients, handling telephone enquiries, making appointments, managing client records;
4. Discuss and reflect on their observations and experiences from a CM perspective;
5.Demonstrate development and consolidation of attributes in effective problem solving and clinical reasoning; information management and processing; communication skills; independent and collaborative empowerment; and appropriate social and cultural awareness and responsiveness.
Content During the first two weeks of semester, students will attend a series of seminars orienting them to the clinical program. Students will be introduced to the Clinical Manual and the clinical CD-ROM, which outlines in detail the policies and procedures that apply to practising Chinese medicine in the School of Health Sciences Teaching Clinics or other approved settings. Topics include issues in relation to acupuncture and herbal medicine practice and dispensing; minimization of cross infection; documentation of patient records; the role of a clinical assistant; reception duties; client care; professional behaviour; contributions to case history discussions; the Health Records Act and other policies and procedures that relate to the workings of the School of Health Sciences Teaching Clinics. Clinical experience is gained through assisting in acupuncture and herbal medicine practice. In addition, students will be engaged in tasks associated with running a viable and efficient Chinese medicine clinic including administration and client contact at reception and the preparation of treatment rooms.
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine Association Code of Ethics. (n.d.). Available from AACMA Web site, http://www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/ Ferrigno, P. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical manual [CD ROM]. St Albans, Australia: Victoria University of Technology, School of Health Sciences, Chinese Medicine Unit. Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current news/draft /InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of rocessed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours or equivalent in approved clinical setting(s) normally spread across one entire semester.
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful completion of required 48 clinical hours (at least 50% of required hours in each of acupuncture and Chinese herbal medicine) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral (single herb identification) assessment (hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Clinical Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT1100 INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH ENHANCEMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to:
1. Perform basic Qi Gong and Tai Ji Quan techniques.
Content Introduction to the idea of Qi, Qi Gong practices, tai ji quan and Qi in the environment.
Required Reading Gunaratana, H. (1991). Mindfulness in plain English. Boston: Wisdom Publications.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Two (2) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One combined practical and oral examination (100%) (proficiency standard hurdle requirement). To obtain at least an Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT1101 ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATION 1
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Introduction to Jing-luo theory and an overview of acupuncture point function and dynamics; proportional measurements; gross surface anatomy as it pertains to the location and depth of acupuncture points; location of acupuncture points on the 12 primary meridians, Ren Mai and Du Mai, and the major extra-ordinary channels; contraindications of specific acupuncture points; depths of needling of acupuncture points. Naming and numbering of the acupuncture points.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (2001). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of acupuncture points. Koln: Konemann.
Recommended Reading Agur, A. M. R., & Dalley, A. F. (2004). Grant's atlas of anatomy (11th ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Moore, K. L. (1992). Clinically oriented anatomy (3rd ed.). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Rogers, C., & Rogers, C. (1995). Point location and points dynamics manual (Rev. ed.). Sydney: ACA Publications. State Administration of TCM China. (1990). The location of acupuncture points. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and workshops. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One practical examination (50%) (proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one written examination (50% ) (hurdle requirement). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (examinations) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT1127 MINOR THESIS - FULLTIME

HHT1137 MINOR THESIS - FULLTIME

HHT1147 MINOR THESIS - PART-TIME

HHT1157 MINOR THESIS (PART-TIME)
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The minor thesis provides students with an opportunity to extend their knowledge and ability to critically analyse issues specific to primary health care and to engage in independent inquiry in an area of professional interest. The thesis will be a research paper and will provide evidence of independent research which demonstrates the ability to define a problem, undertake a detailed literature review, develop a research design appropriate to the topic and collect and analyse, interpret and present data. The thesis should demonstrate a high standard of written communication skills. A supervisor will be appointed to support and oversee the student's research according to guidelines established by the Department of Health Sciences.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours HHT1127 Minor Thesis (full-time), nine hours per week in semester one; HHT1137 Minor Thesis (full-time), twelve hours per week in semester two; HHT1147 Minor Thesis (part-time), three hours per week in semester one; HHT1157 Minor Thesis (part-time), six hours per week in semesters two, three and four.
Assessment One 15,000-20,000 word paper.

HHT1158 MINOR THESIS PART-TIME

HHT1159 MINOR THESIS E PART-TIME

HHT1201 ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATION 2
Campus St Albans.
Prerequisites HHT1101 Acupuncture Point Location 1; or equivalent.
Co-requisites Nil
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to: 1. Accurately locate the acupuncture points utilizing proportional measurements and surface landmarks;
2. Outline the composition and function of the Jing Luo system and the distribution and connection of each of the various components of the system;
3. Describe the surface anatomy associated with locating and needling acupuncture points;
4. Describe the depths of needling of acupuncture points;
5. Discuss the contraindications of specific acupuncture points;
6. Explain the general features and functions of the acupuncture
points, the categories of acupuncture points and their significance, and the naming and numbering of the acupuncture points; 7. Demonstrate development and consolidation of attributes in effective problem solving and clinical reasoning; information management and processing; communication skills; independent and collaborative empowerment; and appropriate social and cultural awareness and responsiveness.

Content Extension and integration of Jing-luo theory and acupuncture point function and dynamics; proportional measurements; gross surface anatomy as it pertains to the location and depth of acupuncture points; location of acupuncture points on the 12 primary meridians, Ren Mai and Du Mai, and the major extra-ordinary channels; contraindications of specific acupuncture points; depths of needling of acupuncture points. Naming and numbering of the acupuncture points.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (2001). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of acupuncture points. Koln: Konemann.
Recommended Reading Agur, A. M. R., & Dalley, A. F. (2004). Grant's atlas of anatomy (11th ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Moore, K. L. (1992). Clinically oriented anatomy (3rd ed.). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Rogers, C., & Rogers, C. (1995). Point location and points dynamics manual (Rev. ed.). Sydney: ACA Publications. State Administration of TCM China. (1990). The location of acupuncture points. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Class Contact Five (5) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and workshops. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One practical examination (50%) (proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one written examination (50% ) (hurdle requirement). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (examinations) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2000 HEALTH ENHANCEMENT (YANG SHENG)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The medicinal use of foods, the use of foods to prevent disease and maintain health, Chinese dietary theory and practice, the role of lifestyle activities, the meaning of mental cultivation, breathing and physical exercises (introduction to Tai Qi or Qi Gong).
Required Reading Chia, M., & Li, J. (1996). The inner structure of tai chi kung. Huntington, New York: Healing Tao Books. Gunaratana, H. (1991). Mindfulness in plain English. Boston: Wisdom Publications. Leggett, D. (1999). Recipes for self-healing. Totnes, Devon: Meridian Press. Sun, G.-N., Liu, Z.-C., Li, H.-0.,Yang, S.-I., &Yang, C.-N.(1990). Health preservation and rehabilitation (X.-Z. Li, Trans. & E. Q. Zhang, Ed.). Shanghai: Shanghai College of Traditional Chinese Medicine Press.
Recommended Reading Chang, C.-l., Cao, Q.-R., & Li, B.-Z. (1996). Vegetables as medicine (R. Edwards & D.-Y. Zeng, Trans.) (2nd ed.). Kurandra, Queensland: Rams Skull Press. Dai, Y.-F., & Liu, C.-J. (1996). Fruit as medicine (R. Edwards & Z.-M. Gong, Trans.) (3rd ed.). Kurandra, Queensland: Rams Skull Press. Flaws, B., & Wolf, H. L. (1993). Prince Wen Hui's cook: Chinese dietary therapy. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Liu, J.-l., & Peck, G. (Eds.). (1995). Chinese dietary therapy. Melbourne, Australia: Churchill Livingstone.
Pitchford, P. (1996).Healing with whole foods. Oriental traditions and modern nutrition (Rev. ed.). Berkeley: North Atlantic. Wilson, G., D. (1993). Take this pebble from my hand. Exploring philosophy, food, energy and balance through Chinese medicine. Brisbane: Seventh Heaven Books.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, laboratories, demonstrations and workshops. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One combined practical and oral assessment (50%); one theory examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (combined practical and oral assessment) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2003 CHINESE MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND PATHOGENESIS 2
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and Pathogenesis 1; HHT1006 Acupuncture Point Location; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopea; or equivalents.
Content Further development of four the 'four examinations', including palpation of channels, points and Hara diagnosis; detail of the differential diagnostic process; disease aetiology illness, Jing luo syndromes, Zang-fu mixed syndromes, febrile disease differentiation - six channels complicated patterns; Wen Bing detail combining Zang Fu, San Jiao and Latent diseases; examination of tongue, skin, and teeth; diagnosis and case histories; individual symptom differentiation; application of Materia Medica and Jing-luo theory in relation to diagnostic outcomes.
Required Reading Deng, T.-T. (1999). Practical diagnosis in traditional Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Liu Yanchi. (Ed.). (1995). Basic theories of traditional Chinese medicine. Beijing: Academy Press. Maciocia, G. (2004). Diagnosis in Chinese medicine: A comprehensive guide. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, seminars, workshops and self managed learning activities.
Assessment One assignment (1200 words) (30%); one combined practical and oral assessment (30%) (hurdle requirement); one final examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (assignment and combined practical and oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted combined practical and oral examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt or resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.

HHT2008 ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING THEORY AND PRACTICE

HHT2009 PHARMACOPOEIA AND DISPENSING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and Pathogenesis 1; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopoeia; or equivalents.
Content The lesser used herbs from the categories of the Materia Medica: release exterior, clear heat, drain downward, drain dampness, expel wind-damp, transform phlegm and stop cough, aromatically transform dampness, relieve food stagnation, regulate qi, regulate xue, warm interior and expel cold, tonifying, (Qi, Yang, Yin, Xue) restrain essence, (stabilise and bind) shen calming, orifice opening, extinguish wind and stop tremors. Pao Zhi theory and practical.
Required Reading Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E. (2004). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd. ed.). Seattle: Eastland Press. Siefert, G. (Ed.). (1996). Understanding Chinese herbs, medical substances. Sydney: Author. Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Sionneau, P. (1997). Dui Yao. The art of combining Chinese medicinals. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press.
Recommended Reading Chen, S., & Li, F. (1993). Clinical guide to Chinese herbs and formula. London: Churchill Livingstone. Coop, P., & Hoang, P. (1997). Character writing manual and index for Chinese Materia Medica. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria University of Technology, Department of Health Sciences. Flaws, B. (1999). 260 essential Chinese medicinals. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Huang, Y.-R. (1995). Advanced textbook of traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 11, Book 1). Beijing: New World Press. Xu, H. (Ed.). (1999). Herb selection booklet. St Albans, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences. Xu, L., & Wang, W. (2002). Chinese Materia Medica. Combinations and applications. Hertz: Donica Publishing.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and practical cooking laboratories. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One written assignment (1200 words) (20%); one combined practical and oral examination (40%) (proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one 2-hour written theory examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (written assignment and combined practical and oral assessment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2010 FORMULAE AND STRATEGIES

HHT2011 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans Campus
Prerequisite(s) Satisfactory completion of Year 1 of the HBAH degree; or equivalent
Content During the first week of the semester, students will attend seminars to orient themselves to the second level of this supervised clinical program and to revisit learning expectations required of students in the clinic. Topics include: preparation of necessary acupuncture equipment for each clinic room; maintenance of client records; methods of Pao Zhi including grinding, dry frying, char frying and honey frying; practical skills include the monitoring consultation processes; herbal identification, use of scales, accurate and safe dispensing of herbs; explanation of herbal preparation to clients; storage and handling of herbs, Materia Medica substitutions; arriving at diagnosis and treatment principle; practitioner diagnosis and treatment details; general client care and comfort; pulse taking; arranging appointments; the role of assistant in the clinical setting; privacy and confidentiality issues.
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine Association Code of Ethics. (n.d.). Available from AACMA Web site, http://www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm
Ferrigno, P. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical manual [CD-ROM]. Chinese Medicine Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of Technology, Australia.
Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture - Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf
Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful completion of required 72 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral examination (proficiency standard hurdle requirement). To obtain at least an Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (combined practical and oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Clinical Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2100 FORMULAE AND STRATEGIES 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and Pathogenesis 1; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopoeia; or equivalents.
Content The fourteen categories in which formulae are assembled. Formula construction. Treatment strategies. Functions, indications and associated treatment principles. Classical and modern applications and interpretations of formulae. Relationship to clinical usage. Differentiation amongst similar formulae. Guidelines for determining correct formulae for particular clinical situations. Notions of dosage and the appropriateness of varying dosages. Formulae modifications.
Required Reading Bensky, D., & Barolet, R. (2004). Chinese herbal medicine. Formulas and strategies. Seattle: Eastland Press. Ellis, A. (2003). Notes from south mountain. A guide to concentrated herb granules. Berkeley: Thin Moon Publishing. Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/html. Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, http://frli.law.gov.au/.
Recommended Reading Dharmananda, S. (1988). Pearls from the golden cabinet. Long Beach, CA: Oriental Healing Arts Institute. Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Geng, J., Juang, W., Ren, T., & Ma, X. (1991). Practical traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology: Herbal formulas. Beijing: New World Press. Qiao, Y., & Stone, A. (2002). The traditional Chinese medicine. Formula study guide. Boulder, CO: Snow Lotus Press. State Administration of TCM. (1995). Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vols. 1 and 2). Beijing: New World Press.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One written examination (end-of-semester) (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (examination) may be resubmitted and re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2104 ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING: THEORY AND PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1201 Acupuncture Point Location 2; RBM1910 Microbiology for Chinese Medicine Practitioners; or equivalents.
Content Surface anatomy relevant to locating and needling of acupuncture points; anatomy relevant to the depths of needling acupuncture points; locating and correctly needling acupuncture points; the notion of intent as it applies in CM practice, needle insertion; obtaining the de Qi sensation; moving Qi; management of needle accidents; contraindications for needling. Review of cupping in the context of needle techniques. The relationship between acupuncture point selection and 'reading' the radial pulse before and after needling. Introduction to plum blossom needling and three-edge bleeding techniques. Jing-luo theory including the muscle-tendino meridians, luo mai, divergent meridians, internal pathways and the inter-relationships between the various elements and meridians; the functions and dynamics of the major categories of acupuncture points.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland Press. Guidelines on Basic Training and Safety in Acupuncture, (1996). Available from World Health Organization Web site, www.who.int/medicines/library/trm/ acupuncture/who-edm-trm-99-1/who-edm-trm-99-1.pdf. Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture - Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf. Pirog, J. E. (1996). The practical application of meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific View Press. Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading Auteroche, B., Gervais, G., Auteroche, M., Navilh, P., & Toui-Kan, E. (1992). Acupuncture and moxibustion. A guide to clinical practice (O. Kivity, Trans.). Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Bai, J. (Ed.). (1977). Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 4). Acupuncture and moxibustion. Beijing: New World Press. Charles, S. (1986). Clinical relationship of the five elements and pathology. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 8-13. Deadman, P. (1984). Needle technique. Part 1. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 14, 11-14. Deadman, P. (1984). Needle technique. Part 2. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 15, 21-23. De Schepper, L. (1995). Acupuncture in practice. New Mexico: Full of Life Publishing. Fraser, P. (1985). Modern needle technique and clinical practice. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 17, 18-21. Gao, L. (1990). Understanding the theory of acupuncture contra-indications according to the Nei Jing. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 34, 21-22. Lade, A. (1989). Acupuncture points: Images and functions. Washington: Eastland Press. Lee, M. (1992). Insights of a senior acupuncturist. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Li, S., & Tan, X. (1998). Chinese therapeutic methods of acupoints. Hunan: Hunan Science and Technology Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of acupuncture points. Köln: Könemann. Lou, B. (1985). Needle technique. Part 1. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 16-19. Lou, B. (1989). Moving qi by needling. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 11, 27-28. Low, R. (1983). The secondary vessels of acupuncture. Northamptonshire: Thorsons. State Administration of TCM China. (1990). The location of acupuncture points. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Class participation (80% participation in tutorials, workshops and laboratory activities) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); one combined practical and oral examination (50% each) (proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (progressive tests and combined practical and oral examinations) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2200 FORMULAE AND STRATEGIES 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2100 Formulae and Strategies 2; or equivalent
Content The fourteen categories in which formulae are assembled. Formula construction. Advanced formulae. Treatment strategies. Functions, indications and associated treatment principles. Classical and modern applications and interpretations of formulae. Relationship to clinical usage. Differentiation amongst similar formulae. Guidelines for determining correct formulae for particular clinical situations. Notions of dosage and the appropriateness of varying dosages. Formulae modifications.
Required Reading Bensky, D., & Barolet, R. (2004). Chinese herbal medicine. Formulas and strategies. Seattle: Eastland Press. Ellis, A. (2003). Notes from south mountain. A guide to concentrated herb granules. Berkeley: Thin Moon Publishing. Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/html. Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site, http://frli.law.gov.au/.
Recommended Reading Dharmananda, S. (1988). Pearls from the golden cabinet. Long Beach, CA: Oriental Healing Arts Institute. Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Geng, J., Juang, W., Ren, T., & Ma, X. (1991). Practical traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology: Herbal formulas. Beijing: New World Press. Qiao, Y., & Stone, A. (2002). The traditional Chinese medicine. Formula study guide. Boulder, CO: Snow Lotus Press. State Administration of TCM. (1995). Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vols. 1 and 2). Beijing: New World Press.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one comprising lectures and tutorials semester. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One essay (1000 words) (30%); one written examination (end-of-semester) (70%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (essay and examination) may be resubmitted and re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement.
All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2202 ACUPUNCTURE THEORY SYSTEMS AND METHODS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this unit, students will be able to: 1. Explain the various acupuncture-related CM theories;
2. Elaborate on how CM theories are applied to acupuncture diagnosis and treatment;
3. Evaluate the appropriateness of CM theories to specific clinical cases;
4. Demonstrate consolidation and establishment of attributes in effective problem solving and clinical reasoning; information management and processing; communication skills; independent and collaborative empowerment; and appropriate social and cultural awareness and responsiveness.

Content The theoretical underpinning, relevance and application of eight extra meridians, the five transporting points, special point groupings (e.g., hui meeting points, xi cleft, source (yuan), shokanten, window of heaven, six channel points, the mating of points, latent disease states, sun si miao’s 12 ghost points, the seven internal/external devil points, Zi wu liu zhu, eight influential points, entry and exit points, sea points and the ten rules of point selection to the practice of acupuncture.
Required Reading Jarrett, L. (2003). The clinical practice of Chinese medicine. Stockbridge: Spirit Path Press. Matsumoto, K., & Birch, S. (1986). Extraordinary vessels. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Pirog, J. (1996). Meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific View Press.
Recommended Reading Deadman, P., & Mazin, A. (1993). The points of the window of heaven. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 43, 32-34. mDeadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland Press. Ellis, A., Wiseman, N., & Boss, K. (1989). Grasping the wind. An exploration into the meaning of Chinese acupuncture point names. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Fraser, P. (1987). Sanbu Jiuhou - nine position pulse taking. Australian Journal of Traditional Chinese Medicine, 3, 26-31. Freeland, D. (1991). The five shu points. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 16, 11-21. Jarrett, L. (1998). Nourishing destiny. The inner tradition of traditional Chinese medicine. Stockbridge: Spirit Path Press. Jarrett, L. (2003). The clinical practice of Chinese medicine. Stockbridge: Spirit Path Press. Lade, A. (1989). Acupuncture points: Images and functions. Washington: Eastland Press. Low, R. (1985). The celestial stems. Acupuncture theory and practice in relation to the influence of cosmic forces upon the body. New York: Thorsons. McDonald, J. (2000). Missing the point. A discussion of strategies for acupuncture point selection Pacific Journal of Oriental Medicine, 15. McDonald, J. Curtains for windows of the sky points. (Reprinted from Pacific Journal of Oriental Medicine, 1999, 14.) Available from J. R. Wahnish Website, http://www.tcmcentral.com/articles/acu_window_sky.htm. Maciocia, G. (1989). The eight extra ordinary vessels. Part 1. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 29. Maciocia, G. (1989). The eight extra ordinary vessels. Part 2. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 30. Ni, M.-S. (1995). The Yellow Emperor’s classic of medicine. Boston: Shambala Publication. Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Wu, J.-N. (1993). Ling Shu or the spiritual pivot. Washington, DC: The Taoist Center.
Class Contact Three (3) hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One assignment (1500 words) (40%); one examination (60%). To obtain a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-submission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.

HHT2203 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 2
CampusSt Albans, Flinders Lane, Off Campus.
Prerequisite(s) HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and Pathogenesis 2; HHT2011 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice 1; or equivalents.
Content During the first week of the semester, students will attend seminars to orient themselves to the second level of this supervised clinical program and to revisit learning expectations required of students in the clinic. Topics include: preparation of necessary acupuncture equipment for each clinic room; maintenance of client records, general procedures involved in managing files including: retrieving and storing of client files, updating files, and preserving the confidentiality of client files; arriving at diagnosis and treatment principle; practitioner diagnosis and treatment details; general client care and comfort; pulse taking; arranging appointments; review of procedures in dispensing herbs (herbal identification, use of scales, accurate dispensing, safe dispensing); an introduction to the more complex methods of processing of herbs. Pao Zhi, Shi liao, moxibustion and acupuncture skills; the role of the assistant in the clinical setting; privacy and confidentiality issues.
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine Association Code of Ethics. (n.d.). Available from AACMA Web site, http://www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm. Ferrigno, P. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical manual [CD-ROM]. Chinese Medicine Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of Technology, Australia. Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture - Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf. Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful completion of required 72 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral examination (proficiency standard hurdle requirement). To obtain at least an Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (combined practical and oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Clinical Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT2205 ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING: THEORY AND PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2104 Acupuncture Needling: theory and Practice 1; RBM1910 Microbiology for Chinese Medicine Practitioners; or equivalents.
Content Surface anatomy relevant to locating and needling of acupuncture points; anatomy relevant to the depths of needling acupuncture points; locating and correctly needling acupuncture points; the notion of intent as it applies in CM practice, needle insertion; obtaining the de Qi sensation; moving Qi; management of needle accidents; contraindications for needling. Review of cupping in the context of needle techniques. The relationship between acupuncture point selection and 'reading' the radial pulse before and after needling. Introduction to plum blossom needling and three-edge bleeding techniques. Jing-luo theory including the muscle-tendino meridians, luo mai, divergent meridians, internal pathways and the inter-relationships between the various elements and meridians; the functions and dynamics of the major categories of acupuncture points. Safety issues; review of aseptic procedures, infection control and risk management strategies.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland Press. Guidelines on Basic Training and Safety in Acupuncture, (1996). Available from World Health Organization Web site, www.who.int/medicines/library/trm/ acupuncture/who-edm-trm-99-1/who-edm-trm-99-1.pdf. Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture - Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-news/draft/ InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf. Pirog, J. E. (1996). The practical application of meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific View Press. Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading Auteroche, B., Gervais, G., Auteroche, M., Navilh, P., & Toui-Kan, E. (1992). Acupuncture and moxibustion. A guide to clinical practice (O. Kivity, Trans.). Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Bai, J. (Ed.). (1977). Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 4). Acupuncture and moxibustion. Beijing: New World Press. Charles, S. (1986). Clinical relationship of the five elements and pathology. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 8-13. Deadman, P. (1984). Needle technique. Part 1. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 14, 11-14. Deadman, P. (1984). Needle technique. Part 2. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 15, 21-23. De Schepper, L. (1995). Acupuncture in practice. New Mexico: Full of Life Publishing. Fraser, P. (1985). Modern needle technique and clinical practice. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 17, 18-21. Gao, L. (1990). Understanding the theory of acupuncture contra-indications according to the Nei Jing. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 34, 21-22. Lade, A. (1989). Acupuncture points: Images and functions. Washington: Eastland Press. Lee, M. (1992). Insights of a senior acupuncturist. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Li, S., & Tan, X. (1998). Chinese therapeutic methods of acupoints. Hunan: Hunan Science and Technology Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of acupuncture points. Köln: Könemann. Lou, B. (1985). Needle technique. Part 1. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 16-19. Lou, B. (1989). Moving qi by needling. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 11, 27-28.
Low, R. (1983). The secondary vessels of acupuncture. Northamptonshire: Thorsons. State Administration of TCM China. (1990). The location of acupuncture points. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Subject hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Class participation (80% participation in tutorials, workshops and laboratory activities) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); one combined practical and oral examination (50% each) (proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (progressive tests and combined practical and oral examinations) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.

HHT3001 INTERNAL MEDICINE
CampusSt Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2001 Fundamental Herbal Formulas; HHT2006 Acupuncture Needling; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHI3003 Therapeutic Applications - Chinese Herbal Medicine; HHK3002 Acupuncture Therapeutic Applications; or equivalents.
Content This subject examines in detail traditional Chinese internal medicine (Nei Ke) based on the fifty-two disorders as specified in the classic the Jin Gui Yao Lue and additional disorders of